12.07.2015 Views

Intersection theory on moduli spaces of curves ... - User Web Pages

Intersection theory on moduli spaces of curves ... - User Web Pages

Intersection theory on moduli spaces of curves ... - User Web Pages

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong><strong>curves</strong> via hyperbolic geometryNorman Nam Van DoSubmitted in total fulfilment <strong>of</strong> the requirements <strong>of</strong>the degree <strong>of</strong> Doctor <strong>of</strong> PhilosophyDecember 2008Department <strong>of</strong> Mathematics and StatisticsThe University <strong>of</strong> MelbourneProduced <strong>on</strong> archival quality paper


iAbstractThis thesis explores the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> genus g stable <strong>curves</strong>with n marked points. Our approach will be via hyperbolic geometry and our starting pointwill be the recent work <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani.One <strong>of</strong> the landmark results c<strong>on</strong>cerning the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n is Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture.K<strong>on</strong>tsevich was the first to provide a pro<strong>of</strong>, the crux <strong>of</strong> which is a formula involving combinatorialobjects known as ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. A subsequent pro<strong>of</strong>, due to Mirzakhani, arises fromc<strong>on</strong>sidering M g,n (L), the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> genus g hyperbolic surfaces with n marked geodesicboundaries whose lengths are prescribed by L = (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n ). Through the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>symplectic structure <strong>on</strong> this space, <strong>on</strong>e can associate to it a volume V g,n (L). Mirzakhani produceda recursi<strong>on</strong> which can be used to effectively calculate these volumes. Furthermore, sheproved that V g,n (L) is a polynomial whose coefficients store intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n .Her work allows us to adopt the philosophy that any meaningful statement about the volumeV g,n (L) gives a meaningful statement about the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and vice versa.Two new results, known as the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, are introduced inthis thesis. These take the form <strong>of</strong> relati<strong>on</strong>s between the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes V g,n (L) andV g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ). Two distinct pro<strong>of</strong>s are supplied — <strong>on</strong>e arising from algebraic geometry andthe other from Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. However, the particular form <strong>of</strong> the generalised stringand dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s is highly suggestive <strong>of</strong> a third pro<strong>of</strong>, using the geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolicc<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. We briefly discuss ideas related to such an approach, although this largely remainswork in progress. Applicati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> these relati<strong>on</strong>s include fast, effective algorithms tocalculate the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes in genus 0 and 1. We also deduce a formula for the volumeV g,0 , a case not dealt with by Mirzakhani.In this thesis, we also give a new pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula, relating the intersecti<strong>on</strong><str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n to the combinatorics <strong>of</strong> ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. Mirzakhani’s theorem suggeststhat the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) store valuable informati<strong>on</strong>. We dem<strong>on</strong>strate that this informati<strong>on</strong>is precisely K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula. Our pro<strong>of</strong> involves using hyperbolic geometryto develop a combinatorial model for M g,n (L) and to analyse the asymptotic behaviour<strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form. The key geometric intuiti<strong>on</strong> involved is the fact that, asthe boundary lengths <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surface approach infinity, the surface resembles a ribb<strong>on</strong>graph after appropriate rescaling <strong>of</strong> the metric. This work draws together K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorialapproach and Mirzakhani’s hyperbolic approach to Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture into a coherentnarrative.


iiDeclarati<strong>on</strong>This is to certify that(i) the thesis comprises <strong>on</strong>ly my original work towards the PhD except where indicated inthe preface;(ii) due acknowledgement has been made in the text to all other material used; and(iii) the thesis is less than 100,000 words in length, exclusive <strong>of</strong> tables, maps, bibliographiesand appendices.Norman Do


iiiPrefaceChapter 1 is a review <strong>of</strong> known results c<strong>on</strong>cerning <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, with the appropriatereferences to the literature c<strong>on</strong>tained therein.Chapter 2 includes results obtained in collaborati<strong>on</strong> with Paul Norbury. More specifically, Secti<strong>on</strong>2.1, Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.2 and parts <strong>of</strong> Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.4 c<strong>on</strong>tain the basic c<strong>on</strong>tent <strong>of</strong> the joint paper [9],though substantially rewritten and elaborated <strong>on</strong>, from my own perspective. Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.3 andthe remaining parts <strong>of</strong> Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.4 c<strong>on</strong>stitute wholly original work.Chapter 3 is the product <strong>of</strong> my own research, although some <strong>of</strong> the ideas have been drawnfrom various sources in the literature. In particular, the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem 3.9 parallels the work<strong>of</strong> Bowditch and Epstein [5]. Furthermore, the c<strong>on</strong>cluding arguments in this chapter followthe structure <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> his combinatorial formula [26]. We note that Secti<strong>on</strong> 3.4essentially reproduces the results appearing in Appendix C <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s paper, though theexpositi<strong>on</strong> is greatly expanded to include more thorough and more elementary pro<strong>of</strong>s.


ivAcknowledgementsFirst and foremost, I would like to thank my principal supervisor, Paul Norbury. Over the years,he has been extremely generous with his time and remarkably insightful with his advice. Underhis guidance, I have developed an increasingly accurate picture <strong>of</strong> what mathematics is aboutand what it is to be a mathematician.I must have been quite a handful to supervise, since it was deemed necessary to assign twoadditi<strong>on</strong>al supervisors to me — namely, Craig Hodgs<strong>on</strong> and Iain Aitchis<strong>on</strong>. I would like toexpress my sincere gratitude to Craig for his patience, to Iain for his integrity, and to both fortheir generosity. Without them, my progress might have been even slower and my perspectivemore narrow.The life <strong>of</strong> a graduate student in mathematics is <strong>of</strong>ten isolating, so I am indebted to those whom Icould bounce ideas <strong>of</strong>f. Particularly deserving <strong>of</strong> menti<strong>on</strong> are Dan Mathews, Nick Sheridan andTom Handscomb, even if they were not always able to fully grasp my unintelligible remarks.I would also like to thank Brad Safnuk for sharing his mathematical expertise with me, whichgreatly facilitated the writing <strong>of</strong> this thesis.I have always been fortunate to have the overwhelming support <strong>of</strong> my family. In particular,I would like to dedicate this thesis to my parents. Without them, I would not be where I amtoday, in so many more ways than <strong>on</strong>e.Last, but certainly not least, I would like to thank my rais<strong>on</strong> d’être, Denise Lin. Her steadfastsupport, unbounded love and beautiful smile inspire me each and every day.


C<strong>on</strong>tents0 Overview 1A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 3A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> 91.1 Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9First principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Natural morphisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Small examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.2 <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Characteristic classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17The tautological ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241.3 Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27The uniformisati<strong>on</strong> theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Teichmüller <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Compactificati<strong>on</strong> and symplectificati<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301.4 Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32v


viC<strong>on</strong>tentsVolumes and symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces 412.1 Volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Three viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422.2 Pro<strong>of</strong>s via algebraic geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Pull-back relati<strong>on</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472.3 Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Bernoulli numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532.4 Applicati<strong>on</strong>s and extensi<strong>on</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Small genus Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Closed hyperbolic surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Further volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula 653.1 K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs and intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66From Witten to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 703.2 Hyperbolic surfaces and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Combinatorial <strong>moduli</strong> space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 763.3 Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78


C<strong>on</strong>tentsviiPreliminary geometric lemmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Asymptotic behaviour <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 853.4 Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Chain complexes associated to a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> an acyclic complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 C<strong>on</strong>cluding remarks 99Bibliography 101A Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes 107A.1 Table <strong>of</strong> Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107A.2 Program for genus 0 Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108


viiiC<strong>on</strong>tents


Chapter 0OverviewIn this chapter, we provide an overview <strong>of</strong> the thesis, including a discussi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the most importantresults obtained, though without all <strong>of</strong> the gory details. The expositi<strong>on</strong> is far fromself-c<strong>on</strong>tained, so those without the requisite background may wish to skim through the chapterfor a taste <strong>of</strong> what lies ahead. On the other hand, those acquainted with the language andmethodology involved in the study <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> should be able to ascertain thescope <strong>of</strong> this thesis.A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>In this thesis, we explore the fascinating world <strong>of</strong> intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong><strong>curves</strong>. The focus will be <strong>on</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> genus g stable <strong>curves</strong> with n marked points, denotedby M g,n . These geometric objects possess a rich structure and arise naturally in the study<strong>of</strong> algebraic <strong>curves</strong> and how they vary in families. One <strong>of</strong> the earliest results in the area datesback to Riemann, who essentially calculated that the real dimensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> M g,n is 6g − 6 + 2n.Subsequently, <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> have been studied by analysts, topologists and algebraicgeometers, with each group c<strong>on</strong>tributing their own set <strong>of</strong> tools and techniques. There has beena recent surge <strong>of</strong> interest in <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, catalysed by the discovery <strong>of</strong> their c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>with string <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>. As a result, they have become rather important objects <strong>of</strong> study inmathematics over the past couple <strong>of</strong> decades. In fact, <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> now lie at the centre<strong>of</strong> a rich c<strong>on</strong>fluence <strong>of</strong> somewhat disparate areas such as geometry, topology, combinatorics,integrable systems, matrix models and theoretical physics.A natural approach to understanding the structure <strong>of</strong> geometric objects is through algebraicinvariants, such as homology and cohomology. To this end, a great deal <strong>of</strong> research has beendedicated to the tautological ring <strong>of</strong> M g,n . This is a subset <strong>of</strong> the cohomology ring H ∗ (M g,n , Q)1


2 0. Overviewwhich is far more tractable, yet retains much <strong>of</strong> the geometrically valuable informati<strong>on</strong>. Of centralimportance in the tautological ring are the psi-classes ψ 1 , ψ 2 , . . . , ψ n ∈ H 2 (M g,n , Q), whichare defined as the Chern classes <strong>of</strong> certain natural complex line bundles over M g,n . Taking cupproducts <strong>of</strong> the psi-classes and evaluating against the fundamental class, <strong>on</strong>e obtains intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>of</strong> the form∫〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 = ψ α 11M ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ∈ Q.g,nThere is reas<strong>on</strong> to believe that these psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers, in some precise sense, storeall <strong>of</strong> the informati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the tautological ring. Therefore, their calculati<strong>on</strong> is <strong>of</strong> tremendoussignificance to understanding the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n .One <strong>of</strong> the landmark results c<strong>on</strong>cerning the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> isWitten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture, now K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s theorem. In his foundati<strong>on</strong>al paper [57], Witten positedthat a particular generating functi<strong>on</strong> for the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers is governed by theKdV hierarchy. There are two rather striking aspects <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture. The first is the factthat it arose from the analysis <strong>of</strong> a model <strong>of</strong> two-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al quantum gravity. This highlightsthe amazing interplay between pure mathematics and theoretical physics that emerges from thestudy <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. The sec<strong>on</strong>d is the appearance <strong>of</strong> the KdV hierarchy, an infinitesequence <strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>-linear partial differential equati<strong>on</strong>s which begins with the KdV equati<strong>on</strong>, theprototypical example <strong>of</strong> an exactly solvable model. This hints at an extraordinary amount <strong>of</strong>structure underlying <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>.The year after Witten stated his c<strong>on</strong>jecture, K<strong>on</strong>tsevich produced a pro<strong>of</strong> as part <strong>of</strong> his doctoralthesis [26]. One <strong>of</strong> the main tools used was a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the decorated uncompactified<strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n × R n + , where the cells are indexed by combinatorial objects known asribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. 1 This allowed him to deduce a formula which combinatorialises the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers into an unc<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al enumerati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. From thispoint, K<strong>on</strong>tsevich was able to use Feynman diagram techniques and a particular matrix modelto show that Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture follows as a corollary.Subsequently, several distinct pro<strong>of</strong>s <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture have emerged. However, <strong>of</strong> particularrelevance to this thesis is Mirzakhani’s pro<strong>of</strong> [33, 34], which adopts the approach <strong>of</strong>hyperbolic geometry. For an n-tuple <strong>of</strong> positive real numbers L = (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n ), let M g,n (L)denote the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> genus g hyperbolic surfaces with n marked geodesic boundaries<strong>of</strong> lengths L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n . This space possesses a symplectic structure via the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>symplectic form ω. Therefore, <strong>on</strong>e can endow M g,n (L) with a well-defined volume, which wedenote by V g,n (L). It is natural to explore the behaviour <strong>of</strong> the symplectic structure and volume<strong>of</strong> M g,n (L) as <strong>on</strong>e varies the boundary lengths.1 The terms fatgraph and ribb<strong>on</strong> graph are used interchangeably in the literature. The noti<strong>on</strong> was introduced byPenner [48] who coined the former, while K<strong>on</strong>tsevich adopted the latter. Which term to use is largely a matter <strong>of</strong> tasteor, in the case <strong>of</strong> this author, a matter <strong>of</strong> habit.


3The calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) in all generality was first performed by Mirzakhani, who accomplishedthe following.She produced a scheme for integrating a special class <strong>of</strong> functi<strong>on</strong>s over the <strong>moduli</strong> spaceM g,n (L) and generalised McShane’s identity, a remarkable formula c<strong>on</strong>cerning lengths <strong>of</strong>geodesics <strong>on</strong> a hyperbolic surface. Using these in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong>, Mirzakhani managed todeduce a recursive formula from which the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes could be effectivelycalculated. One corollary is the fact that V g,n (L) is an even symmetric polynomial in thevariables L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n <strong>of</strong> degree 6g − 6 + 2n.Mirzakhani used certain results c<strong>on</strong>cerning symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> in order to prove thatV g,n (L) =(2π 2 ) m ∫ M g,nψ α 11∑ψα 22 . . . ψα n|α|+m=3g−3+n2 |α| α!m!n κ m 1L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn .Here, and subsequently in this thesis, α = (α 1 , α 2 , . . . , α n ) represents an n-tuple <strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>negativeintegers. In additi<strong>on</strong>, we will adopt the shorthand |α| = α 1 + α 2 + · · · + α n andα! = α 1 !α 2 ! . . . α n !. Note the appearance <strong>of</strong> κ 1 ∈ H 2 (M g,n , Q), which denotes the firstMumford–Morita–Miller class. The upshot <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s theorem is the fact that thevolume V g,n (L) is a polynomial whose coefficients store intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n .In particular, note that the intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>of</strong> psi-classes al<strong>on</strong>e are stored in the topdegree part.Of course, combining these two results yields a recursive procedure for calculating all psi-classintersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers. Therefore, it should come as little surprise that Mirzakhani was able toprove Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture. What is surprising is that she accomplished this by directly verifyingthat Witten’s generating functi<strong>on</strong> for the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers satisfies certain equati<strong>on</strong>sknown as Virasoro c<strong>on</strong>straints. Mirzakhani’s pro<strong>of</strong> was also the first to appear which didnot require the use <strong>of</strong> a matrix model. But perhaps the most notable aspect <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’swork is the fact that it is deeply rooted in hyperbolic geometry.Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesThe main goal <strong>of</strong> this thesis is to explore intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, usingthe work <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani as a starting point. Her results allow us to adopt the philosophy thatany meaningful statement about the volume V g,n (L) gives a meaningful statement about theintersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and vice versa. The guiding viewpoint is that the approach <strong>of</strong>hyperbolic geometry has something to c<strong>on</strong>tribute to this <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>. A particular c<strong>on</strong>sequence isthat <strong>on</strong>e may be able to find new relati<strong>on</strong>s am<strong>on</strong>g the intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong>


4 0. Overview<strong>curves</strong>. In this thesis, we introduce two such results, which relate the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesV g,n (L) and V g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ). For reas<strong>on</strong>s which will hopefully become clear, we refer to theseas the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s. 2Theorem 2.1 (Generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfythe following relati<strong>on</strong>.V g,n+1 (L, 2πi) =n ∫∑k=1L k V g,n (L) dL kTheorem 2.2 (Generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumessatisfy the following relati<strong>on</strong>.∂V g,n+1∂L n+1(L, 2πi) = 2πi(2g − 2 + n)V g,n (L)The particular form <strong>of</strong> these relati<strong>on</strong>s suggests various things. For example, their succinct natureis evidence that the volume polynomial V g,n (L) is a valuable way to package intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . Furthermore, it appears that these may be the first two in a sequence <strong>of</strong>equati<strong>on</strong>s which describe the derivatives <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes, with <strong>on</strong>e argumentevaluated at 2πi. The appearance <strong>of</strong> the number 2πi itself indicates that there should be someinteresting geometry underlying these results. In fact, we claim that a hyperbolic geometric approachis <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> three natural strategies with which to prove the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong>equati<strong>on</strong>s.Algebraic geometry. By Mirzakhani’s theorem, the coefficients <strong>of</strong> the volume polynomialsV g,n (L) and V g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) store intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Thus,we may unravel the string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s to obtain equivalent statements involvingthe intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n and M g,n+1 . The advantage <strong>of</strong> the algebro-geometricapproach is that there is a natural way to relate intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> these two <strong>spaces</strong>.Such relati<strong>on</strong>s arise from the analysis <strong>of</strong> cohomology classes under pull-back and pushforwardby the forgetful morphism π : M g,n+1 → M g,n , which forgets the last markedpoint. We prove the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s in this manner.Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. One way to pass from a hyperbolic surface with n + 1 boundarycomp<strong>on</strong>ents to a hyperbolic surface with n boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents is to remove a pair <strong>of</strong>pants. This is essentially the mechanism by which Mirzakhani’s recursive formula inductivelyreduces the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L). Since it governs all <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>volumes, the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s should be encapsulated, in some2 It is quite reas<strong>on</strong>able to w<strong>on</strong>der why the first theorem in Chapter 0 has been labelled Theorem 2.1. This is due tothe fact that it also appears as the first theorem in Chapter 2. Indeed, throughout this chapter, all results have beennumbered according to their subsequent appearance in the thesis.


5sense, in her recursi<strong>on</strong>. We show that this is indeed true and, furthermore, that this approachrequires certain interesting relati<strong>on</strong>s c<strong>on</strong>cerning the Bernoulli numbers.Hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. Another way to pass from a hyperbolic surface with n + 1 boundarycomp<strong>on</strong>ents to a hyperbolic surface with n boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents is to degenerate<strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> them to a c<strong>on</strong>e point with c<strong>on</strong>e angle 2π. The evaluati<strong>on</strong> L n+1 = 2πi in the generalisedstring and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s is highly suggestive that these relati<strong>on</strong>s may be provenusing the geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. We briefly discuss these ideas, whichshould lead to new pro<strong>of</strong>s and insights, although such an approach largely remains workin progress.There are various simple applicati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s. For example,we prove that they uniquely determine V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) from V 0,n (L) and V 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 )from V 1,n (L). Together with the base cases V 0,3 (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 ) and V 1,1 (L 1 ) = 148 (L2 1 + 4π2 ), this resultsin an effective algorithm to compute the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes in genus 0 and genus 1much faster than implementing Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. We also prove the following theorem,which includes a formula for V g,0 , a case not dealt with by Mirzakhani.Theorem 2.12.(i) When n = 1, the volume factorises as V g,1 (L) = (L 2 + 4π 2 )P g (L) for some polynomial P g .(ii) For g ≥ 2, we have the following formula.V g,0 =1 ∂V g,14πi(g − 1) ∂L (2πi) = P g(2πi)g − 1As menti<strong>on</strong>ed earlier, the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s appear to be part <strong>of</strong> a potentiallyinfinite sequence <strong>of</strong> relati<strong>on</strong>s. The search for these has uncovered the following equati<strong>on</strong>involving the sec<strong>on</strong>d derivative <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. Of course, the hope is that therewill be more to follow.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 2.14. For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfy the following relati<strong>on</strong>.∂ 2 V g,n+1(L, 2πi) =∂L 2 n+1[ n∑k=1L k]∂− (4g − 4 + n) V g,n (L)∂L kA new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaAs menti<strong>on</strong>ed earlier, the crux <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture is a formula whichrelates psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers to combinatorial objects known as ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. These


6 0. Overvieware defined to be graphs with all vertices <strong>of</strong> degree at least three such that there is a cyclicordering <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting at each vertex. This cyclic ordering allows <strong>on</strong>e to thicken thegraph in a well-defined manner to obtain a surface with boundary. We say that the ribb<strong>on</strong> graphis <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) if this results in a c<strong>on</strong>nected surface with genus g and n boundary comp<strong>on</strong>entslabelled from 1 up to n. For a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ, there is the noti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> its group <strong>of</strong> automorphisms,which is denoted by Aut Γ. Let the set <strong>of</strong> ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) be RG g,n and the subsetc<strong>on</strong>sisting <strong>of</strong> trivalent graphs be TRG g,n . With this notati<strong>on</strong> in place, we may state K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’scombinatorial formula as follows.Theorem 3.4 (K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula). The psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,nsatisfy the following formula.∑|α|=3g−3+n〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉n∏k=1(2α k − 1)!!s 2α k+1k2= ∑2g−2+n|AutΓ∈TRG g,nΓ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e)Here, E(Γ) denotes the set <strong>of</strong> edges <strong>of</strong> Γ and the expressi<strong>on</strong> (2α − 1)!! is a shorthand for (2α)!2 α α!. For anedge e, the terms l(e) and r(e) are the labels <strong>of</strong> the boundaries <strong>on</strong> its left and right.Observe that the left hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula is a polynomial in thevariabless 1 , 1 1 s 2, . . . ,s 1nwhose coefficients store all psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . Theright hand side can be c<strong>on</strong>sidered a particular enumerati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type(g, n) which, a priori, appears <strong>on</strong>ly to be a rati<strong>on</strong>al functi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> s 1 , s 2 , . . . , s n . That the two sidesc<strong>on</strong>cur is quite a remarkable phenomen<strong>on</strong>.In this thesis, we give a new pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula via hyperbolic geometry.Our starting point is Mirzakhani’s theorem, which relates intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> to volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces. In particular, we observedearlier that the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n are stored in the top degree part<strong>of</strong> V g,n (L). This suggests that it may be useful to c<strong>on</strong>sider the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>volumes. In fact, a directly corollary <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s theorem is the fact that the Laplace transform<strong>of</strong> the asymptotics{}V g,n (Nx 1 , Nx 2 , . . . , Nx n )L limN→∞ N 6g−6+2nis precisely the left hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula. It practically goes withoutsaying that we then wish to prove that this expressi<strong>on</strong> is also equal to the right hand side. Thepro<strong>of</strong> can be c<strong>on</strong>ceptually divided into three main parts.Part 1: Why do we obtain a sum over trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs?Embedded <strong>on</strong> a hyperbolic surface with geodesic boundary is a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph, formedfrom the set <strong>of</strong> points with at least two shortest paths to the boundary. In fact, there isa way to use the hyperbolic structure to assign a positive real number to every edge so


7that <strong>on</strong>e obtains what is referred to as a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph. We refer to this numberas the length <strong>of</strong> the edge and the sum <strong>of</strong> the numbers around a boundary as the length<strong>of</strong> the boundary. The space <strong>of</strong> metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) with boundary lengthsprescribed by x = (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) forms a topological space — in fact, an orbifold — whichwe denote by MRG g,n (x). Using an argument analogous to that <strong>of</strong> Bowditch and Epsteinwhich appears in [5], we prove the following.Theorem 3.9. The <strong>spaces</strong> M g,n (x) and MRG g,n (x) are homeomorphic as orbifolds.Therefore, <strong>on</strong>e may equivalently c<strong>on</strong>sider MRG g,n (x) rather than M g,n (x). One advantageis that the space <strong>of</strong> metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs possesses the natural orbifold cell decompositi<strong>on</strong>MRG g,n (x) =⋃MRG Γ (x),Γ∈RG g,nwhere a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph lies in the set MRG Γ (x) if its underlying ribb<strong>on</strong> graph coincideswith Γ. Furthermore, MRG Γ (x) is top-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al if and <strong>on</strong>ly if the ribb<strong>on</strong> graphΓ is trivalent. Since the volume does not care about cells <strong>of</strong> positive codimensi<strong>on</strong>, it canbe expressed as a sum over trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs as follows, where V Γ (x) denotes theWeil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume <strong>of</strong> MRG Γ (x).V g,n (x) =∑Γ∈TRG g,nV Γ (x)Part 2: Why do we obtain a product over the edges <strong>of</strong> the trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph?Fix a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ ∈ TRG g,n and an n-tuple <strong>of</strong> positive real numbers x = (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ).Then for every positive real number N, we have the mapf : MRG Γ (x) → MRG Γ (Nx) → M g,n (Nx),which is a homeomorphism <strong>on</strong>to its image. This is the compositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> two maps — thefirst scales the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph metric by a factor <strong>of</strong> N while the sec<strong>on</strong>d uses the Bowditch–Epstein c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. C<strong>on</strong>sider the normalised Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form ω <strong>on</strong>N 2M g,n (Nx) and note that it pulls back via f to a symplectic form <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ (x). The behaviour<strong>of</strong> this 2-form as N approaches infinity is described by the theorem below. Thepro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> this statement, which relies <strong>on</strong> a mixture <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic geometry and combinatorics,is <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the main technical c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong>s in this part <strong>of</strong> the thesis. The key geometricintuiti<strong>on</strong> involved is the fact that, as the boundary lengths <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surfaceapproach infinity, the surface resembles a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph after appropriate rescaling <strong>of</strong> themetric. It has been brought to our attenti<strong>on</strong> that this result, with an alternative pro<strong>of</strong>, hasalso appeared recently in the work <strong>of</strong> M<strong>on</strong>dello [36].Theorem 3.20. In the N → ∞ limit, f ∗ ωN 2 c<strong>on</strong>verges pointwise <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ (x) to a 2-form Ω.


8 0. OverviewNote that the space <strong>of</strong> metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs MRG Γ (x) possesses a tractable system <strong>of</strong>coordinates, provided by the edge lengths. In particular, with respect to these coordinates,Ω is a c<strong>on</strong>stant 2-form.Furthermore, MRG Γ (x) has a simple descripti<strong>on</strong> — it is thequotient <strong>of</strong> a polytope by the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the finite group Aut Γ. Therefore, modulo someanalytical details, we have the equalitylimN→∞V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n = ∫MRG Γ (x)Ω 3g−3+n(3g − 3 + n)! .From the previous discussi<strong>on</strong>, this is essentially the integral <strong>of</strong> a c<strong>on</strong>stant volume formover a polytope. The integrati<strong>on</strong> is most easily evaluated after taking the Laplace transform,which results in the desired product over edges <strong>of</strong> Γ. Furthermore, the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the1finite group Aut Γ <strong>on</strong> this polytope naturally introduces the factor <strong>of</strong> which appears|Aut Γ|<strong>on</strong> the right hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula.Part 3: Where does the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant come from?Interestingly, the remaining factor <strong>of</strong> 2 2g−2+n <strong>on</strong> the right hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorialformula is no simple matter to explain. In fact, its appearance boils down to thefollowing statement.Theorem 3.22. Let Γ be a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) with n edges coloured white and theremaining 6g − 6 + 2n edges coloured black. Let A be the n × n adjacency matrix formed betweenthe faces and the white edges. Let B be the (6g − 6 + 2n) × (6g − 6 + 2n) oriented adjacencymatrix formed between the black edges. Thendet B = 2 2g−2 (det A) 2 .Perhaps surprisingly, there does not exist a purely combinatorial pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> this statementin the literature. Instead, we essentially follow the argument from Appendix C <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’spaper [26], which uses the torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> an acyclic chain complex associated to atrivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph. However, our expositi<strong>on</strong> is greatly expanded to make the pro<strong>of</strong>both more thorough and more elementary.Of course, K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula in itself is not a new result. What is novel, in thispart <strong>of</strong> the thesis, is the hyperbolic geometric approach and the explicit c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between thework <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich and Mirzakhani. We believe that this pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorialformula is rather intuitive in nature, avoids the technical difficulties which are inherent in theoriginal pro<strong>of</strong>, and may lead to further insights. Indeed, as a part <strong>of</strong> joint work with Safnuk [10],we have extended these ideas to produce a recursive formula à la Mirzakhani which computesthe asymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L). The differential versi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> this formula is the Virasoro c<strong>on</strong>straintc<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>, thereby providing a new path to Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture. We also believe that it will notbe difficult to extend these ideas to integrati<strong>on</strong> over the combinatorially defined Witten cycles.


Chapter 1A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>In this chapter, we introduce the main characters <strong>of</strong> our story, <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. The aimis to provide a c<strong>on</strong>cise expositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the important results and ideas which form the backgroundto this thesis. Newcomers to the area will hopefully find this chapter a suitable point <strong>of</strong> entry tothe now vast body <strong>of</strong> knowledge c<strong>on</strong>cerning <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. However, the selecti<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> material presented here is necessarily <strong>on</strong>ly a small subset, chosen to suit our specific needsand reflect our particular point <strong>of</strong> view. For example, a great deal <strong>of</strong> attenti<strong>on</strong> has been paidto intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, to the interacti<strong>on</strong> between algebraic andhyperbolic geometry, and to the recent results <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani. Throughout the chapter, detailsand pro<strong>of</strong>s have <strong>of</strong>ten been omitted for the sake <strong>of</strong> clarity and space. For those interested infurther informati<strong>on</strong>, there are numerous references to the relevant sources in the literature. 11.1 Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>First principlesInformally, the points <strong>of</strong> a <strong>moduli</strong> space classify objects <strong>of</strong> a certain type, while its geometryreflects the way in which these objects can vary in families. For example, c<strong>on</strong>sider the <strong>moduli</strong>spaceM g = {C | C is a smooth algebraic curve <strong>of</strong> genus g} / ∼1 In particular, we start by menti<strong>on</strong>ing the articles [43, 55, 56] which have influenced our expositi<strong>on</strong> and which aresuitable for those wishing to discover this remarkable area <strong>of</strong> mathematics for the first time.9


10 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>where C ∼ D if and <strong>on</strong>ly if there exists an isomorphism from C to D. 2 Now suppose thatφ : X → B is a family <strong>of</strong> smooth <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus g. (More precisely, φ should be a properflat morphism <strong>of</strong> schemes whose fibres are smooth <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus g.) Then we can form themap f : B → M g which sends b to the point in M g that represents the equivalence class <strong>of</strong>the fibre over b. One would certainly expect this map to be c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, and the set M g can beendowed with a well-defined topology such that this is true. Furthermore, there should be afamily π : C g → M g <strong>of</strong> smooth <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus g such that its pull-back via f produces theoriginal family over B. Such a family is referred to as the universal family over M g .XC gφ∨Bfπ∨> M gX = f ∗ C gC<strong>on</strong>versely, every map from B to M g gives rise to a family <strong>of</strong> smooth <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus g overB by pulling back the universal family. This provides us with an extremely useful dicti<strong>on</strong>arycorresp<strong>on</strong>dence which translates statements about families <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> to statements about thegeometry <strong>of</strong> the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>moduli</strong> space. 3Unfortunately, if <strong>on</strong>e adopts this somewhat naive point <strong>of</strong> view, then certain technical issuesarise in the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. The root <strong>of</strong> these evils is the fact that somealgebraic <strong>curves</strong> possess n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphisms. We will address three particular problemscaused by such <strong>curves</strong>, and these will lead us to develop the more refined noti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong>stack M g,n .Since there is <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e smooth genus 0 curve up to isomorphism, <strong>on</strong>e might expect M 0to be a point. This, in turn, would imply that the pull-back <strong>of</strong> the universal family overany base would be trivial. However, it is clear that there exist locally trivial yet globallyn<strong>on</strong>-trivial families with fibre CP 1 . The discrepancy is due to the fact that CP 1 has a largeautomorphism group which allows trivial pieces to be glued together in a n<strong>on</strong>-trivial way.One soluti<strong>on</strong> to this problem is to c<strong>on</strong>sider <strong>curves</strong> with sufficiently many marked points toensure that their automorphism groups are finite. Therefore, we define the <strong>moduli</strong> space{M g,n = (C, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n )∣}/C is a smooth algebraic curve <strong>of</strong> genus g∼with n distinct points p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n2 We decree that all algebraic <strong>curves</strong> referred to in this thesis are to be complex, c<strong>on</strong>nected and complete.3 The informed reader will hopefully be reminded <strong>of</strong> the relati<strong>on</strong>ship between vector bundles and Grassmannians,whose <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> may be c<strong>on</strong>sidered a paradigm for the <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. When studying Grassmannians,<strong>on</strong>e is normally motivated to c<strong>on</strong>sider their intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, which has a rich structure relating to combinatorics andrepresentati<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>. In a similar vain, we c<strong>on</strong>sider the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, which has asimilarly rich structure, but <strong>of</strong> a very different nature.


1.1. Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> 11where (C, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n ) ∼ (D, q 1 , q 2 , . . . , q n ) if and <strong>on</strong>ly if there exists an isomorphismfrom C to D which sends p k to q k for all k. The resulting equivalence classes are referred toas pointed <strong>curves</strong>. Note that the automorphism group <strong>of</strong> a pointed curve is finite as l<strong>on</strong>gas there are at least three marked points in the case <strong>of</strong> genus 0 and at least <strong>on</strong>e markedpoint in the case <strong>of</strong> genus 1. As a result, we will <strong>on</strong>ly c<strong>on</strong>sider the <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> M g,nwhich satisfy the Euler characteristic c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> 2 − 2g − n < 0. Pointed <strong>curves</strong> arise naturallyin many geometric situati<strong>on</strong>s — for example, given a family <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> with a number<strong>of</strong> disjoint secti<strong>on</strong>s — so the added effort required to keep track <strong>of</strong> the marked points isoutweighed by the added benefit.Later in this chapter, we discuss the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n using an approachfrom Teichmüller <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>. There are actually a few different c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, althoughthere is <strong>on</strong>e comm<strong>on</strong> feature underlying them all. They each c<strong>on</strong>sider pointed <strong>curves</strong> endowedwith some extra structure, so that the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding parameter space is a manifold.Taking the quotient <strong>of</strong> this space by the relati<strong>on</strong> which identifies the additi<strong>on</strong>alstructures then yields the <strong>moduli</strong> space as the quotient <strong>of</strong> a manifold by a group acti<strong>on</strong>.In all such c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, there necessarily exist points where the acti<strong>on</strong> is not free, andthese corresp<strong>on</strong>d precisely to those <strong>curves</strong> with n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphism group. Therefore,M g,n is naturally an orbifold, where the orbifold group at a point is can<strong>on</strong>icallyisomorphic to the automorphism group <strong>of</strong> the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding pointed curve. However,the situati<strong>on</strong> is not so bad, since the following theorem — due to Boggi and Pikaart [4]and also to Looijenga [28] — allows <strong>on</strong>e to make sense <strong>of</strong> calculati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the orbifold bylifting to a finite cover.Theorem 1.1. There exists a finite cover ˜M g,n → M g,n such that ˜M g,n is a smooth manifold.The upshot is that many <strong>of</strong> the techniques and theorems which apply to manifolds canbe carried over to the orbifold setting, with <strong>on</strong>ly the obvious modificati<strong>on</strong>s required. Forour purposes, note that it is necessary to c<strong>on</strong>sider the cohomology <strong>of</strong> M g,n with rati<strong>on</strong>alrather than integral coefficients.There is no universal family C g,n → M g,n , at least not in the sense that we have described.In fact, the fibre over a point in M g,n corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to a pointed curve C withautomorphism group G is C/G. Since <strong>curves</strong> with n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphisms occur naturallyin families, this causes a real problem. The crux <strong>of</strong> the matter is that the universalfamily cannot be c<strong>on</strong>structed in the category <strong>of</strong> schemes, where most algebraic geometerslive. However, the issue disappears as l<strong>on</strong>g as <strong>on</strong>e is willing to work in the category <strong>of</strong>Deligne–Mumford stacks, first introduced in [8]. This category is ideal in the sense thatit is just large enough to allow for the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the universal family while still beingrestricted enough to retain geometric c<strong>on</strong>cepts such as smoothness, vector bundles,cohomology, and so <strong>on</strong>.


12 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>Admittedly, the definiti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a Deligne–Mumford stack is rather technical. To presentit here would take us too far afield from our goal and may even obscure the geometricnature <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>. However, <strong>on</strong>e will not go too far wr<strong>on</strong>g thinking <strong>of</strong> a smoothDeligne–Mumford stack as a complex orbifold. The stack structure takes care <strong>of</strong> the extrabookkeeping required to deal with <strong>curves</strong> with n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphisms. Essentially,this will allow us to treat the <strong>moduli</strong> space as smooth and ensure that there is a universalfamily over it. The reader interested in discovering more <strong>on</strong> stacks is encouraged toc<strong>on</strong>sult [14] and the references c<strong>on</strong>tained therein.Those troublesome <strong>curves</strong> with n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphisms have led us to c<strong>on</strong>sider <strong>moduli</strong>stacks <strong>of</strong> pointed <strong>curves</strong>. However, there is still <strong>on</strong>e outstanding issue which needs to be addressed— M g,n is not compact. To see this, observe that when two marked points <strong>on</strong> a pointedcurve approach each other, then the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding limit does not exist in M g,n . Of course, thereare numerous advantages in working with a compact space. And although there are variousways to compactify the <strong>moduli</strong> space, it is becoming increasingly clear that the most pr<strong>of</strong>itableis to use what is known as the Deligne–Mumford compactificati<strong>on</strong>. One <strong>of</strong> its virtues is that itis modular — in other words, it is a <strong>moduli</strong> space for a well-behaved, easy to describe, class <strong>of</strong><strong>curves</strong>. In fact, all we need to do is gently relax our smoothness c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. Thus, we define theDeligne–Mumford compactificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space{M g,n = (C, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n )∣}/C is a stable algebraic curve <strong>of</strong> genus g with∼n distinct smooth points p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p nwhere (C, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n ) ∼ (D, q 1 , q 2 , . . . , q n ) if and <strong>on</strong>ly if there exists an isomorphism from Cto D which sends p k to q k for all k. Here, an algebraic curve is called stable if it has at worstnodal singularities and a finite automorphism group. The practical interpretati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> this latterc<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> is that every rati<strong>on</strong>al comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> the curve must have at least three special points,where a special point refers to a node or a marked point. It should be clear that M g,n ⊆ M g,n ,and we refer to M g,n \ M g,n as the boundary divisor. Theorem 1.1 can be extended to thecompactificati<strong>on</strong> as follows.Theorem 1.2. There exists a finite cover ˜M g,n → M g,n such that ˜M g,n is a smooth manifold. Furthermore,the boundary divisor lifts to a uni<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> codimensi<strong>on</strong> two submanifolds intersecting transversally.The questi<strong>on</strong> still remains as to which curve arises in the limit when two marked points approacheach other. To see what the correct answer should be, c<strong>on</strong>sider a family <strong>of</strong> genus g<strong>curves</strong> with n marked points φ : X → B, where B is smooth and <strong>of</strong> complex dimensi<strong>on</strong> 1. Themarked points give rise to n secti<strong>on</strong>s which we denote by σ 1 , σ 2 , . . . , σ n : B → X. Supposethat all fibres are stable pointed <strong>curves</strong> apart from over the point b where the secti<strong>on</strong>s σ i andσ j intersect. In order to obtain a family <strong>of</strong> stable <strong>curves</strong>, <strong>on</strong>e simply needs to blow up the surfaceX at the point σ i (b) = σ j (b) to obtain π : ˜X → X. The new family <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> is given by


1.1. Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> 13˜φ : ˜X → B where ˜φ = φ ◦ π. Note that the fibres are unchanged away from b, whereas thenew fibre over b c<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> the old fibre plus the excepti<strong>on</strong>al divisor obtained from blowing up.Furthermore, the points σ i (b) and σ j (b) now lie <strong>on</strong> the excepti<strong>on</strong>al divisor and are distinct asl<strong>on</strong>g as the secti<strong>on</strong>s σ i and σ j intersected transversally. Therefore, in the limit when two markedpoints approach each other, a CP 1 bubbles <strong>of</strong>f, c<strong>on</strong>taining these two marked points. This is aparticular instance <strong>of</strong> the more general process known as stable reducti<strong>on</strong>. 4Theorem 1.3 (Stable reducti<strong>on</strong>). Let b be a point <strong>on</strong> a smooth curve B and suppose that X is a family <strong>of</strong>stable <strong>curves</strong> over B \ {b}. Then after a sequence <strong>of</strong> blow-ups and blow-downs and passing to a branchedcover <strong>of</strong> B, <strong>on</strong>e can obtain a new family where all fibres are stable <strong>curves</strong>. Furthermore, the fibre over b inthis new family is uniquely determined.More complicated stable pointed <strong>curves</strong> arise from more complicated limits, such as the exampleshown in the following diagram. 5236781495We note now the important foundati<strong>on</strong>al result thatdim R M g,n = 6g − 6 + 2n,a calculati<strong>on</strong> which dates back to Riemann. Later in this chapter, we will see how the uncompactified<strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n actually arises as the quotient <strong>of</strong> an open ball <strong>of</strong> real dimensi<strong>on</strong>6g − 6 + 2n by a properly disc<strong>on</strong>tinuous group acti<strong>on</strong>.Natural morphismsOne interesting and useful aspect <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> pointed <strong>curves</strong> is the interplay betweenthem. As a simple example <strong>of</strong> this phenomen<strong>on</strong>, note that if g ≤ g ′ and n ≤ n ′ , then M g,n canbe c<strong>on</strong>sidered a subvariety <strong>of</strong> M g ′ ,n′. The following natural morphisms between <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong><strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> are <strong>of</strong> particular importance.4 For further details <strong>on</strong> stable reducti<strong>on</strong>, <strong>on</strong>e need look no further than [22]. In fact, the book is an excellent reference<strong>on</strong> the algebraic geometry <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> in general.5 Recall that the singularities <strong>of</strong> a stable pointed curve must be nodal and, hence, locally look like xy = 0 at the origin.In order to represent such a singularity <strong>on</strong> a two-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al page, <strong>on</strong>e usually resorts to drawing the two <strong>curves</strong> aspinched or tangent, both <strong>of</strong> which are misleading.


14 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>Forgetful morphism. Given a stable genus g curve with n + 1 marked points, <strong>on</strong>e can forgetthe point labelled n + 1 to obtain a genus g curve with n marked points. Unfortunately,the resulting curve may not be stable, but gives rise to a well-defined stable curve afterc<strong>on</strong>tracting all rati<strong>on</strong>al comp<strong>on</strong>ents with <strong>on</strong>ly two special points. This gives a map π :M g,n+1 → M g,n , which we refer to as a forgetful morphism.1 21 231 23121 3122Gluing morphism I. Given a stable genus g curve with n + 2 marked points, <strong>on</strong>e can gluetogether the points labelled n + 1 and n + 2 to obtain a stable genus g curve with n markedpoints. This gives a map gl 1 : M g,n+2 → M g+1,n which we refer to as a gluing morphism.1 213Gluing morphism II. Given a stable genus g 1 curve with n 1 + 1 marked points and a stablegenus g 2 curve with n 2 + 1 marked points, <strong>on</strong>e can glue together the last two points toobtain a stable genus g 1 + g 2 curve with n 1 + n 2 marked points. This gives a map gl 2 :M g1 ,n 1 +1 × M g2 ,n 2 +1 → M g1 +g 2 ,n 1 +n 2which we also refer to as a gluing morphism.12313212Permutati<strong>on</strong> morphism. Given a stable genus g curve with n marked points and a permutati<strong>on</strong>σ ∈ S n , <strong>on</strong>e can use σ to permute the labels <strong>on</strong> the marked points. This gives amap — in fact, an isomorphism — P σ : M g,n → M g,n which we refer to as a permutati<strong>on</strong>morphism.


1.1. Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> 15Note that the forgetful morphism π : M g,n+1 → M g,n can be interpreted as the universalfamily π : C g,n → M g,n . In other words, <strong>on</strong>e can take a stable curve C ∈ M g,n al<strong>on</strong>g with apoint p <strong>on</strong> C and associate a stable curve ˜C ∈ M g,n+1 to the pair (C, p).If p is a smooth unmarked point <strong>of</strong> C, then let ˜C be the curve C with the point p labelledn + 1.If p is the point <strong>of</strong> C labelled k, then let ˜C be the curve C with a CP 1 bubbled <strong>of</strong>f at thepoint p, c<strong>on</strong>taining points labelled k and n + 1.If p is a nodal point <strong>of</strong> C, then let ˜C be the curve C with a CP 1 bubbled <strong>of</strong>f at the point p,c<strong>on</strong>taining a point labelled n + 1.In this way, the point labelled k defines a secti<strong>on</strong> σ k : M g,n → M g,n+1 for k = 1, 2, . . . , n.Furthermore, the image <strong>of</strong> σ k c<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> all <strong>curves</strong> in M g,n+1 with a CP 1 bubbled <strong>of</strong>f, c<strong>on</strong>tainingpoints labelled k and n + 1, and no other marked points.The forgetful morphism can be used to pull back cohomology classes, but it will also be usefulto push them forward. This is possible via the Gysin map π ∗ : H ∗ (M g,n+1 ) → H ∗ (M g,n ),which is a homomorphism <strong>of</strong> graded rings with grading −2. One can interpret the Gysin mapas integrating al<strong>on</strong>g fibres but it can be alternatively defined by the following compositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong>maps, where d = dim(M g,n+1 ) and the outer maps denote Poincaré duality.π ∗ : H k (M g,n+1 ) PD −→ H d−k (M g,n+1 ) π ∗−→ H d−k (M g,n ) PD −→ H k−2 (M g,n )One <strong>of</strong> the nice properties enjoyed by the Gysin map is the push-pull formula, which states thatπ ∗ (απ ∗ β) = π ∗ (α)β for α ∈ H ∗ (M g,n+1 ) and β ∈ H ∗ (M g,n ). Another property that we willmake use <strong>of</strong> is the fact that ∫∫η = π ∗ η.M g,n+1 M g,nSmall examplesIn general, <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> are not <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>of</strong> high dimensi<strong>on</strong>, but also possess a very complicatedstructure. However, there are a handful <strong>of</strong> cases for which we can provide a c<strong>on</strong>cretedescripti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> their geometry. We c<strong>on</strong>clude this secti<strong>on</strong> with some <strong>of</strong> these small examples,which are <strong>of</strong>ten useful to keep in mind.Example 1.4 (The <strong>moduli</strong> space M 0,3 ). The <strong>on</strong>ly smooth genus 0 algebraic curve up to isomorphismis CP 1 and the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> its automorphism group is sharply transitive <strong>on</strong> triples <strong>of</strong>points. In other words, every smooth rati<strong>on</strong>al curve with three marked points (C, p 1 , p 2 , p 3 ) canbe mapped isomorphically to (CP 1 , 0, 1, ∞) in a unique manner. It follows that M 0,3 is a point


16 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>and, since there are no stable nodal <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus 0 with three marked points, it also followsthat M 0,3 is a point.Example 1.5 (The <strong>moduli</strong> space M 0,4 ). Similarly, every smooth genus 0 curve with four markedpoints (C, p 1 , p 2 , p 3 , p 4 ) can be mapped isomorphically to (CP 1 , 0, 1, ∞, λ) in a unique mannerfor some λ /∈ {0, 1, ∞}. In fact, λ can be interpreted as the cross-ratio <strong>of</strong> the quadruple(p 1 , p 2 , p 3 , p 4 ) through the equati<strong>on</strong>λ = (p 1 − p 4 )(p 3 − p 2 )(p 1 − p 2 )(p 3 − p 4 ) .It follows that M 0,4 is equal to CP 1 \ {0, 1, ∞}. The boundary divisor c<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> three pointswhich represent the following three nodal <strong>curves</strong>.211213343424Respectively, these <strong>curves</strong> corresp<strong>on</strong>d to λ = 0, λ = 1 and λ = ∞, so M 0,4 is equal to CP 1 .Example 1.6 (The <strong>moduli</strong> space M 0,5 ). Let π : CP 1 × CP 1 → CP 1 be a family <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>,where π is defined by projecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>to the first factor. C<strong>on</strong>sider the four secti<strong>on</strong>s σ 1 (z) = (z, 0),σ 2 (z) = (z, 1), σ 3 (z) = (z, ∞) and σ 4 (z) = (z, z). Note that the fibre over a point b /∈ {0, 1, ∞} isa copy <strong>of</strong> CP 1 with four distinct marked points which have cross-ratio equal to b. The secti<strong>on</strong>σ 4 meets σ 1 , σ 2 and σ 3 transversally <strong>on</strong> the fibres over 0, 1 and ∞. To remove these intersecti<strong>on</strong>s,blow up CP 1 × CP 1 at the points (0, 0), (1, 1) and (∞, ∞), creating the excepti<strong>on</strong>al divisors E 0 ,E 1 and E ∞ , respectively. Now the three fibres over 0, 1 and ∞ are precisely the three nodal<strong>curves</strong> corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to the boundary divisor <strong>of</strong> M 0,4 .σ 3σ 2CP 1 × CP 1σ 1πσ 4CP 10 1 ∞


1.2. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 17Therefore, the family we have described is precisely the universal family C 0,4 → M 0,4 . However,as noted earlier, <strong>on</strong>e may interpret this family as the forgetful map M 0,5 → M 0,4 . So wemay now c<strong>on</strong>clude that M 0,5 is equal to CP 1 × CP 1 blown up at the three points (0, 0), (1, 1)and (∞, ∞).Example 1.7 (The <strong>moduli</strong> space M 1,1 ). The uncompactified <strong>moduli</strong> space M 1,1 is essentiallythe <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> complex elliptic <strong>curves</strong>. Every elliptic curve arises as a 2-fold branchedcovering <strong>of</strong> CP 1 doubly ramified over ∞. Topological c<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s force such a covering tohave three additi<strong>on</strong>al ramificati<strong>on</strong> points which we can send to 0, 1 and λ /∈ {0, 1, ∞}. The affineequati<strong>on</strong> for such a curve is y 2 = x(x − 1)(x − λ), and we let the marked point corresp<strong>on</strong>d tothe unique point <strong>on</strong> the curve over ∞. Note that there was some choice in normalising theramificati<strong>on</strong> points, so we expect an S 3 symmetry to appear. C<strong>on</strong>cretely, this manifests as <strong>on</strong>e<strong>of</strong> the six transformati<strong>on</strong>s given by λ ↦→ λ, λ ↦→λ 1 1λ−1, λ ↦→ 1 − λ, λ ↦→1−λ, λ ↦→λandλ ↦→λ−1 λ . This symmetry can be dealt with by associating to each curve y2 = x(x − 1)(x − λ)its j-invariantj(λ) = 256 (λ2 − λ + 1) 3λ 2 (λ − 1) 2 ,which satisfies j(λ) = j(λ ′ ) if and <strong>on</strong>ly if λ ′ ∈ {λ,λ 1 , 1 − λ, 11−λ , λ−1λ , λλ−1}. C<strong>on</strong>versely, it iswell-known that the j-invariant distinguishes between elliptic <strong>curves</strong> which are not isomorphic.Therefore, we deduce that M 1,1∼ = C.There is precisely <strong>on</strong>e stable nodal curve <strong>of</strong> genus 1 with <strong>on</strong>e marked point and this corresp<strong>on</strong>dsprecisely to the j → ∞ limit, so M 1,1∼ = CP 1 . Our discussi<strong>on</strong> up to this point has completelyignored the orbifold — or stack — structure <strong>of</strong> M 1,1 . The case <strong>of</strong> M 1,1 is excepti<strong>on</strong>al since everygenus 1 curve with <strong>on</strong>e marked point has at least <strong>on</strong>e n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphism — namely, theelliptic involuti<strong>on</strong>. Furthermore, the curve with j-invariant 0 actually has an automorphismgroup isomorphic to Z 6 while the curve with j-invariant 1728 has an automorphism groupisomorphic to Z 2 × Z 2 . Therefore, every point <strong>of</strong> M 1,1 is an orbifold point <strong>of</strong> order 2, apartfrom <strong>on</strong>e point <strong>of</strong> order 4 and <strong>on</strong>e point <strong>of</strong> order 6.1.2 <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>Characteristic classesGiven a space with interesting topological structure, <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the first compulsi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> a geometeris <strong>of</strong>ten to calculate associated algebraic invariants. And so it is with <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>,except for the fact that their homology and cohomology are notoriously intractable in general.However, a great deal <strong>of</strong> progress can be made in this directi<strong>on</strong> if <strong>on</strong>e is willing to adopt thefollowing two simplificati<strong>on</strong>s.


18 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>We c<strong>on</strong>centrate <strong>on</strong> a subset <strong>of</strong> the cohomology ring known as the tautological ring.We calculate the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, rather than the full ring structure, <strong>of</strong> the tautologicalring with respect to certain characteristic classes.Later we will see how these simplificati<strong>on</strong>s leave us with a much more manageable approach tounderstanding the structure <strong>of</strong> M g,n without forsaking too much <strong>of</strong> the interesting geometry.The characteristic classes that we will c<strong>on</strong>sider live in the cohomology ring H ∗ (M g,n ) as wellas its algebraic analogue, the Chow ring A ∗ (M g,n ).These are related by the natural mapA k (M g,n ) → H 2k (M g,n ), where the doubling <strong>of</strong> the index is due to the fact that the grading<strong>of</strong> the Chow ring is by complex dimensi<strong>on</strong>. However, it is worth noting that the Chow ringis neither weaker nor str<strong>on</strong>ger than the cohomology ring, since each carries informati<strong>on</strong> whichthe other does not. For example, although the Chow ring cannot detect odd-graded cohomology,it can distinguish between any two points <strong>on</strong> a smooth elliptic curve. For the remainder<strong>of</strong> this thesis, we will generally use the cohomological framework and language, which will befamiliar to a wider audience. Practically all <strong>of</strong> the questi<strong>on</strong>s we c<strong>on</strong>sider are equivalent in eithersetting.Many <strong>of</strong> the cohomology classes <strong>on</strong> M g,n <strong>of</strong> geometric interest arise from taking Chern classes<strong>of</strong> natural vector bundles. For example, c<strong>on</strong>sider the vertical cotangent bundle <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 =C g,n with fibre at (C, p) equal to the cotangent line T ∗ p C. Unfortunately, this definiti<strong>on</strong> is n<strong>on</strong>sensicalwhen p is a singular point <strong>of</strong> C. Therefore, it is necessary to c<strong>on</strong>sider the relative dualisingsheaf, the unique line bundle <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 which extends the vertical cotangent bundle. Moreprecisely, it can be defined asL = K X ⊗ π ∗ K −1B ,where K X denotes the can<strong>on</strong>ical line bundle <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 and K B denotes the can<strong>on</strong>ical linebundle <strong>on</strong> M g,n . Secti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> L al<strong>on</strong>g a n<strong>on</strong>-singular fibre corresp<strong>on</strong>d precisely to holomorphic1-forms <strong>on</strong> that fibre. However, secti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> L al<strong>on</strong>g a singular fibre corresp<strong>on</strong>d to meromorphic1-forms with at worst simple poles allowed at the nodes as well as an extra residue c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>.This c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> states that the two residues at the preimages <strong>of</strong> each node under normalisati<strong>on</strong>must sum to zero.One obtains natural line bundles <strong>on</strong> M g,n by pulling back L al<strong>on</strong>g the secti<strong>on</strong>s σ k : M g,n →M g,n+1 for k = 1, 2, . . . , n. Taking Chern classes <strong>of</strong> these line bundles, we obtain the psi-classesψ k = c 1 (σ ∗ k L) ∈ H2 (M g,n , Q) for k = 1, 2, . . . , n.It is possible to define the Euler class ẽ = c 1 (L), but this completely ignores the marked points.Far more useful is the twisted Euler class given by e = c 1 (L (D 1 + D 2 + · · · + D n )), whereD k ⊆ M g,n+1 denotes the image <strong>of</strong> the secti<strong>on</strong> σ k : M g,n → M g,n+1 . In a small and hopefullyexcusable abuse <strong>of</strong> notati<strong>on</strong>, we will use D k to represent the divisor, the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding homol-


1.2. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 21bers. Generating functi<strong>on</strong>s are comm<strong>on</strong>ly used to encode informati<strong>on</strong> about the intersecti<strong>on</strong><str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n . That this result can be expressed so succinctly using them highlights the combinatorialnature <strong>of</strong> the tautological ring. This fact is reinforced by the presence <strong>of</strong> the Bernoullinumbers, which will make another appearance in Chapter 2.The following statement was first c<strong>on</strong>jectured by Hain and Looijenga [20].C<strong>on</strong>jecture 1.13. The tautological ring R ∗ (M g,n ) is a Poincaré duality ring <strong>of</strong> dimensi<strong>on</strong> 3g − 3 + n.To understand the c<strong>on</strong>tent <strong>of</strong> this c<strong>on</strong>jecture, we break it into three parts.Vanishing c<strong>on</strong>jecture. For k > 3g − 3 + n, R k (M g,n ) ∼ = 0.Socle c<strong>on</strong>jecture. R 3g−3+n (M g,n ) ∼ = Q.Perfect pairing c<strong>on</strong>jecture. For 0 ≤ k ≤ 3g − 3 + n, the following natural product is a perfectpairing.R k (M g,n ) × R 3g−3+n−k (M g,n ) → R 3g−3+n (M g,n ) ∼ = QIn order to appreciate the depth <strong>of</strong> these statements, <strong>on</strong>e must c<strong>on</strong>sider the tautological rings assubsets <strong>of</strong> the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding Chow rings. For instance, if we were to c<strong>on</strong>sider the tautologicalring as a subset <strong>of</strong> the cohomology ring, then the socle c<strong>on</strong>jecture would be trivially true. On theother hand, the socle c<strong>on</strong>jecture is neither obvious in the tautological Chow ring nor even truein the full Chow ring. At present, the c<strong>on</strong>jecture remains unresolved, although there is a fairamount <strong>of</strong> low genus evidence. And if the c<strong>on</strong>jecture is true, then <strong>on</strong>e important c<strong>on</strong>sequencewould be that it is possible to recover the structure <strong>of</strong> the entire tautological ring from the topintersecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> tautological classes al<strong>on</strong>e. Furthermore, from Definiti<strong>on</strong> 1.8, any top intersecti<strong>on</strong>sin the tautological ring can be determined from the top intersecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> psi-classes al<strong>on</strong>e.Therefore, we are motivated to study intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>of</strong> the form∫ψ α 11M ψα 22 . . . ψα nng,n∈ Qwhere |α| = 3g − 3 + n or equivalently, g =3 1 (|α| − n + 3). It will be c<strong>on</strong>venient to adopt Witten’snotati<strong>on</strong> for these psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers, which suppresses the genus and encodesthe symmetry between the psi-classes.∫〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 = ψ α 11M ψα 22 . . . ψα nng,nWe treat the τ variables as commuting, so that we can write intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers in the form〈τ d 00 τd 11 τd 22 . . .〉 and we set 〈τ α 1τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 = 0 if n = 0 or if the genus g = 1 3(|α| − n + 3) isn<strong>on</strong>-integral or negative. In this way, we have defined a linear functi<strong>on</strong>al〈·〉 : Q[τ 0 , τ 1 , τ 2 , . . .] → Q.


22 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>Example 1.14 (Psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M 0,3 ). The <strong>on</strong>ly n<strong>on</strong>-zero intersecti<strong>on</strong> number<strong>on</strong> M 0,3 is 〈τ0 3 〉, which is equal to 1 by definiti<strong>on</strong>. This encodes the fact that there is a uniquegenus 0 curve with three marked points and that such a curve has trivial automorphism group.Example 1.15 (Psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M 0,4 ). From Example 1.6, we know that M 0,5is the blow up <strong>of</strong> CP 1 × CP 1 at the three points (0, 0), (1, 1) and (∞, ∞). The forgetful mapπ : M 0,5 → M 0,4 is simply the projecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>to the first CP 1 factor. The singular fibres occurover 0, 1 and ∞ and corresp<strong>on</strong>d to the three nodal <strong>curves</strong> illustrated in Example 1.5. The foursecti<strong>on</strong>s are given by σ 1 (z) = (z, 0), σ 2 (z) = (z, 1), σ 3 (z) = (z, ∞) and σ 4 (z) = (z, z).This c<strong>on</strong>crete descripti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the universal family over M 0,5 allows us to calculate its cohomologyexplicitly. It is generated by the five divisors H, F, E 0 , E 1 , E ∞ , where H = CP 1 × {h} forsome h /∈ {0, 1, ∞}, F = { f } × CP 1 for some f /∈ {0, 1, ∞} and E 0 , E 1 , E ∞ are the excepti<strong>on</strong>aldivisors <strong>of</strong> the blow-ups. For ease <strong>of</strong> notati<strong>on</strong>, we will use these <strong>curves</strong> to represent their divisorclasses, homology classes and Poincaré dual cohomology classes. The intersecti<strong>on</strong> matrix withrespect to the ordered basis (H, F, E 0 , E 1 , E ∞ ) has the following simple form.⎡0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 00 0 −1 0 0⎢⎣ 0 0 0 −1 00 0 0 0 −1Since this matrix is invertible, we can deduce the value <strong>of</strong> a cohomology class X from the intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers X · H, X · F, X · E 0 , X · E 1 and X · E ∞ . This allows us to calculate D 1 = H − E 0 .Now if we denote by T the vertical tangent bundle, then a secti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> σ1 ∗ T corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to achoice <strong>of</strong> vertical vector for each point in D 1 . This is precisely a secti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the normal bundle toD 1 ⊆ M 0,5 . The degree <strong>of</strong> this normal bundle is the self-intersecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> D 1 in M 0,5 , so we have∫⎤⎥⎦M 0,4c 1 (σ ∗ 1 T ) = D 1 · D 1 .Taking the dual gives∫M 0,4ψ 1 = −D 1 · D 1 = −(H − E 0 ) · (H − E 0 ) = 1,from which we c<strong>on</strong>clude that 〈τ0 3τ 1〉 = 1.Example 1.16 (Psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M 1,1 ). Let f (x, y) and g(x, y) be generic cubicpolynomials and c<strong>on</strong>sider the family <strong>of</strong> cubic <strong>curves</strong>F = {(x, y, t) | f (x, y) − tg(x, y) = 0} ⊆ CP 2 × CP 1


1.2. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 23over the base B = CP 1 , parametrised by t. The cubic <strong>curves</strong> f (x, y) = 0 and g(x, y) = 0 intersectin nine points p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p 9 and we may choose the point p 1 as the marked point in our family.This family then induces a map φ : B → M 1,1It turns out that F is the blow-up <strong>of</strong> CP 2 at the points p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p 9 . By a similar reas<strong>on</strong>ing tothe previous example,∫M 1,1ψ 1 = 1deg φ∫Bφ ∗ ψ 1 = − 1deg φ S 1 · S 1 ,where S 1 denotes the image <strong>of</strong> the secti<strong>on</strong> associated to the marked point. In this case, S 1 isprecisely the excepti<strong>on</strong>al divisor over p 1 , so S 1 · S 1 = −1.Note that the unique singular curve in M 1,1 will appear in the family F precisely when thediscriminant vanishes. The discriminant <strong>of</strong> a cubic curve is a polynomial <strong>of</strong> degree 12 in itscoefficients, hence a polynomial <strong>of</strong> degree 12 in t. The singular curve is generic enough todeduce that the degree <strong>of</strong> the map φ : B → M 1,1 is 12. However, since the generic point in M 1,1is an orbifold point <strong>of</strong> order two, the true degree <strong>of</strong> the map φ is actually 2 × 12 = 24. Therefore,we have∫〈τ 1 〉 = ψ 1 = 1M 1,124 .The psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers c<strong>on</strong>tain a great deal <strong>of</strong> structure, as hinted by the followingfact.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.17 (String equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers satisfythe relati<strong>on</strong>〈τ 0 τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 =n∑k=1〈τ α1 . . . τ αk −1 . . . τ αn 〉.Observe that the string equati<strong>on</strong> reduces a psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> number <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 which hasa ψ k appearing with exp<strong>on</strong>ent zero to a sum <strong>of</strong> psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . In fact,from the base case 〈τ0 3 〉 = 1 and the string equati<strong>on</strong>, all psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers in genus 0can be uniquely determined. To see this, note that every n<strong>on</strong>-zero psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> number<strong>on</strong> M 0,n must be <strong>of</strong> the form 〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉, where |α| = n − 3. So at least <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> α 1 , α 2 , . . . , α nmust be equal to 0 and the string equati<strong>on</strong> reduces the calculati<strong>on</strong> to a sum <strong>of</strong> intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>on</strong> M 0,n−1 . Therefore, these numbers can be calculated inductively, starting from thebase case 〈τ0 3 〉 = 1. The particularly pleasant case <strong>of</strong> genus 0 yields a particularly pleasantanswer. In fact, when |α| = n − 3 we have〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 =(n − 3)!,α!which is tantalisingly combinatorial.


24 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.18 (Dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers satisfythe relati<strong>on</strong>〈τ 1 τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 = (2g − 2 + n)〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉.Observe that the dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> reduces a psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> number <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 which hasa ψ k appearing with exp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>on</strong>e to a psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> number <strong>on</strong> M g,n . In fact, fromthe base case 〈τ 1 〉 =24 1 , as well as the string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, all psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers in genus 1 can be uniquely determined. To see this, note that every n<strong>on</strong>-zero psi-classintersecti<strong>on</strong> number <strong>on</strong> M 1,n must be <strong>of</strong> the form 〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉, where |α| = n. So at least<strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> α 1 , α 2 , . . . , α n must be equal to 0 or 1. In the former case, the string equati<strong>on</strong> reducesthe calculati<strong>on</strong> to a sum <strong>of</strong> intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M 1,n−1 while in the latter case, the dilat<strong>on</strong>equati<strong>on</strong> reduces the calculati<strong>on</strong> to an intersecti<strong>on</strong> number <strong>on</strong> M 1,n−1 . Therefore, these numberscan be calculated inductively, starting from the base case 〈τ 1 〉 =24 1 . Unfortunately — orperhaps fortunately, depending <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e’s outlook — there exists no simple closed formula forpsi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers for the case <strong>of</strong> genus g ≥ 1.Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jectureOne <strong>of</strong> the landmark results c<strong>on</strong>cerning the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> isWitten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture, now K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s theorem. In his foundati<strong>on</strong>al paper [57], Witten c<strong>on</strong>jecturedthat a particular generating functi<strong>on</strong> for the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers satisfies theKorteweg–de Vries hierarchy, <strong>of</strong>ten abbreviated to the KdV hierarchy. This sequence <strong>of</strong> partialdifferential equati<strong>on</strong>s begins with the KdV equati<strong>on</strong>, which originally arose in classical physicsto model waves in shallow water. It is now well-known as the prototypical example <strong>of</strong> an exactlysolvable model, whose solit<strong>on</strong> soluti<strong>on</strong>s have attracted tremendous mathematical interestover the past few decades.Interestingly, Witten was led to his c<strong>on</strong>jecture from the analysis <strong>of</strong> a particular model <strong>of</strong> twodimensi<strong>on</strong>alquantum gravity, where <strong>on</strong>e encounters infinite-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al integrals over thespace <strong>of</strong> Riemannian metrics <strong>on</strong> a surface. Arguing <strong>on</strong> physical grounds, such a calculati<strong>on</strong> canbe reduced to finitely many dimensi<strong>on</strong>s in two distinct ways. First, the integral can be localisedto the space <strong>of</strong> c<strong>on</strong>formal classes <strong>of</strong> metrics, which leads directly to computati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, <strong>on</strong>e can produce singular metrics <strong>on</strong> a surface by tiling it with trianglesand declaring them to be equilateral. As the number <strong>of</strong> triangles tends to infinity, thesesingular metrics begin to approximate random metrics and the infinite-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al integralsreduce to asymptotic enumerati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> such triangulati<strong>on</strong>s. Enumerati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> this kind are performedusing Feynman diagram and matrix model techniques and are known to be governedby the KdV hierarchy.In order to describe Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture explicitly, let t = (t 0 , t 1 , t 2 , . . .) and τ = (τ 0 , τ 1 , τ 2 , . . .)


1.2. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 25and c<strong>on</strong>sider the generating functi<strong>on</strong> F(t) = 〈exp(t · τ)〉. Here, the expressi<strong>on</strong> is to be expandedas a Taylor series using multilinearity in the variables t 0 , t 1 , t 2 , . . .. Equivalently, defineF(t 0 , t 1 , t 2 , . . .) = ∑d∞∏k=0t d kkd k ! 〈τd 00 τd 11 τd 22 . . .〉where the summati<strong>on</strong> is over all sequences d = (d 0 , d 1 , d 2 , . . .) <strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>-negative integers withfinitely many n<strong>on</strong>-zero terms. Witten c<strong>on</strong>jectured that the formal series U = ∂2 Fsatisfiesthe KdV hierarchy <strong>of</strong> partial differential equati<strong>on</strong>s. More explicitly, Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture canbe stated as follows.Theorem 1.19 (Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture). The generating functi<strong>on</strong> F satisfies the following partial differentialequati<strong>on</strong> for every n<strong>on</strong>-negative integer n.(2n + 1) ∂3 F∂t n ∂t 2 0( ∂=2 ) ( ) ( ) ( )F ∂ 3 F ∂∂t n−1 ∂t 0 ∂t 3 + 3 F ∂ 2 F20∂t n−1 ∂t 2 0∂t 2 + 1 ∂ 5 F40∂t n−1 ∂t 4 0∂t 2 0Given Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture, the string equati<strong>on</strong> and the base case 〈τ0 3 〉 = 1, every intersecti<strong>on</strong>number <strong>of</strong> psi-classes can be obtained. The following example dem<strong>on</strong>strates this via the calculati<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> 〈τ 1 〉.Example 1.20. Observe that∂ n F∂t α1 ∂t α2 · · · ∂t αn∣ ∣∣∣t=0= 〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉,and c<strong>on</strong>sider the equati<strong>on</strong> in Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture with n = 3 evaluated at t = 0. This yieldsthe equality 7〈τ 2 0 τ 3〉 = 〈τ 0 τ 2 〉〈τ 3 0 〉 + 2〈τ2 0 τ 2〉〈τ 2 0 〉 + 1 4 〈τ4 0 τ 2〉. Now use the fact that 〈τ 2 0 〉 = 0and the base case 〈τ0 3〉 = 1 to reduce the relati<strong>on</strong> to 7〈τ2 0 τ 3〉 = 〈τ 0 τ 2 〉 + 1 4 〈τ4 0 τ 2〉. Applyingthe string equati<strong>on</strong> to each term, we obtain 7〈τ 1 〉 = 〈τ 1 〉 + 1 4 〈τ3 0〉 from which it follows that〈τ 1 〉 =24 1 〈τ3 0 〉 = 24 1 . Note that this is in agreement with the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> 〈τ 1〉 in Example 1.16.A thorough analysis <strong>of</strong> the KdV hierarchy allows Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture to be stated in an alternativeway. Define the sequence <strong>of</strong> Virasoro operators byV −1 = − 1 2∂∂t 0+ 1 2and for positive integers n,(2n + 3)!!V n = −2∂+∂t n+1∞∂∑ t k+1 + t2 0∂tk=0 k 4 , V 0 = − 3 2∞∑k=0(2k + 2n + 1)!!2(2k − 1)!!t k∂+∂t k+n∂∂t 1+ 1 2∑k 1 +k 2 =n−1∞∑k=0∂(2k + 1)t k + 1∂t k 48 ,(2k 1 + 1)!!(2k 2 + 1)!!4∂ 2∂t k1 ∂t k2.The operators are named so because they span a subalgebra <strong>of</strong> the Virasoro Lie algebra. It is


26 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>relatively straightforward to verify that they satisfy the relati<strong>on</strong> [V m , V n ] = (m − n)V m+n for allm and n. One can state Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture in terms <strong>of</strong> the Virasoro operators in a rather succinctfashi<strong>on</strong>.Theorem 1.21 (Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture — Virasoro versi<strong>on</strong>). For every integer n ≥ −1,V n (exp F) = 0.Witten originally provided evidence for his c<strong>on</strong>jecture in the form <strong>of</strong> the string and dilat<strong>on</strong>equati<strong>on</strong>s as well as low genus results [57]. In particular, the string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s corresp<strong>on</strong>dprecisely to the annihilati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> exp F by the operators V −1 and V 0 , respectively. Sincethen, several pro<strong>of</strong>s <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture have emerged, three <strong>of</strong> which we briefly discuss here.K<strong>on</strong>tsevich [26]The year after Witten announced his c<strong>on</strong>jecture, K<strong>on</strong>tsevich produced a pro<strong>of</strong> as part <strong>of</strong> hisdoctoral thesis. He used a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> M g,n × R n + arising from results c<strong>on</strong>cerningquadratic differentials <strong>on</strong> a Riemann surface known as Jenkins–Strebel differentials.This allowed him to deduce a combinatorial formula which equates a generating functi<strong>on</strong>for the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers with a particular enumerati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> combinatorialobjects known as trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. K<strong>on</strong>tsevich carried out this enumerati<strong>on</strong> usingFeynman diagram techniques and a certain matrix model, from which Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecturefollowed. His pro<strong>of</strong> will be discussed in greater detail in Secti<strong>on</strong> 3.1.Okounkov and Pandharipande [44]The main tool in their pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture was the ELSV formula. Originallyproven by Ekedahl, Lando, Shapiro and Vainshtein [11], this formula relates intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>of</strong> psi-classes and Hodge classes — also known as Hodge integrals — withHurwitz numbers. Hurwitz numbers enumerate topological types <strong>of</strong> branched covers <strong>of</strong>the sphere or, equivalently, factorisati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> permutati<strong>on</strong>s into transpositi<strong>on</strong>s. Okounkovand Pandharipande reproduced the ELSV formula using a technique known as virtuallocalisati<strong>on</strong> and proceeded to show that K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula was a c<strong>on</strong>sequence,using asymptotic combinatorial methods.Mirzakhani [33, 34]More recently, Mirzakhani has produced a pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture quite distinct fromthose before her. In particular, she adopts a hyperbolic geometric approach and c<strong>on</strong>sidersthe symplectic geometry <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces. We will have a lot moreto say about Mirzakhani’s work in Secti<strong>on</strong> 1.4.We point out that there are also other pro<strong>of</strong>s — such as that by Kazarian and Lando [24] or byKim and Liu [25] — but these have a lesser bearing <strong>on</strong> the work c<strong>on</strong>tained in this thesis.


1.3. Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces 271.3 Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfacesThe uniformisati<strong>on</strong> theoremOne <strong>of</strong> the most important foundati<strong>on</strong>al results in algebraic geometry asserts that the category<strong>of</strong> irreducible projective algebraic <strong>curves</strong> and the category <strong>of</strong> compact Riemann surfaces areequivalent. Due to this equivalence, the boundary between these two fields is rather porous,with techniques from complex analysis flowing into algebraic geometry and vice versa. Inadditi<strong>on</strong>, the following theorem allows us to adopt a geometric viewpoint when dealing withalgebraic <strong>curves</strong> or Riemann surfaces.Theorem 1.22 (The uniformisati<strong>on</strong> theorem). Every metric <strong>on</strong> a surface is c<strong>on</strong>formally equivalent toa complete c<strong>on</strong>stant curvature metric. Furthermore, the sign <strong>of</strong> the curvature is equal to the sign <strong>of</strong> theEuler characteristic <strong>of</strong> the surface.From the previous discussi<strong>on</strong>, a smooth genus g algebraic curve with n marked points corresp<strong>on</strong>dsto a genus g Riemann surface with n marked points, which we think <strong>of</strong> as punctures.{} {smooth algebraic <strong>curves</strong> with←→genus g and n marked points}Riemann surfaces withgenus g and n puncturesThe complex structure defines a c<strong>on</strong>formal class <strong>of</strong> metrics which, by the uniformisati<strong>on</strong> theorem,c<strong>on</strong>tains a hyperbolic metric when 2g − 2 + n > 0. Furthermore, if we demand that the resultingsurface has finite area, then this hyperbolic metric is unique and endows each puncturewith the structure <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic cusp. So we have the following <strong>on</strong>e-to-<strong>on</strong>e corresp<strong>on</strong>dence.{} {}smooth algebraic <strong>curves</strong> withhyperbolic surfaces with←→genus g and n marked pointsgenus g and n cuspsModuli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces can be given a natural topology. The corresp<strong>on</strong>dencedescribed above defines a map from the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> smooth algebraic <strong>curves</strong> to the <strong>moduli</strong>space <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces which respects not <strong>on</strong>ly this topology, but also the structurepreservingautomorphism group <strong>of</strong> the surface. In short, the map is a homeomorphism <strong>of</strong> orbifolds.Therefore, we can and will use the notati<strong>on</strong> M g,n to denote the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> smoothgenus g <strong>curves</strong> with n marked points as well as the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> genus g hyperbolic surfaceswith n cusps — the particular meaning should be clear from the c<strong>on</strong>text.If the finite area c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> is relaxed, then there exist hyperbolic metrics which endow eachpuncture with the structure <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic flare. Each such flare has a unique geodesic waistcurve which, after being cut al<strong>on</strong>g, leaves a compact hyperbolic surface with geodesic boundaries.Furthermore, the <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>of</strong> the removed flare is the length <strong>of</strong> the geodesic waist


1.3. Moduli <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces 29Lemma 1.23. Given three n<strong>on</strong>-negative real numbers L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , there exists a unique hyperbolic pair <strong>of</strong>pants up to isometry with geodesic boundaries <strong>of</strong> lengths L 1 , L 2 , L 3 . We refer to the three geodesic arcsperpendicular to the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents and joining them in pairs as the seams. Every hyperbolic pair<strong>of</strong> pants can be decomposed into two c<strong>on</strong>gruent right-angled hexag<strong>on</strong>s by cutting al<strong>on</strong>g the seams. Asper usual, a boundary <strong>of</strong> length 0 corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to a hyperbolic cusp.Note that the lengths l 1 , l 2 , . . . , l 3g−3+n provide insufficient informati<strong>on</strong> to rec<strong>on</strong>struct the hyperbolicstructure <strong>on</strong> all <strong>of</strong> X, since there are infinitely many ways to glue together the hyperbolicpairs <strong>of</strong> pants. This extra gluing informati<strong>on</strong> is stored in the twist parameters, which wedenote by τ 1 , τ 2 , . . . , τ 3g−3+n . To c<strong>on</strong>struct them, fix a collecti<strong>on</strong> C <strong>of</strong> disjoint <strong>curves</strong> <strong>on</strong> S g,nwhich are either closed or have endpoints <strong>on</strong> the boundary. We require that C meets the pair<strong>of</strong> pants decompositi<strong>on</strong> transversely, and such that its restricti<strong>on</strong> to any particular pair <strong>of</strong> pantsc<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> three disjoint arcs, c<strong>on</strong>necting the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents pairwise. Now to c<strong>on</strong>structthe twist parameter τ k , note that there are either <strong>on</strong>e or two <strong>curves</strong> γ ∈ C such that f (γ) meetsγ k . Homotopic to f (γ), relative to the boundary <strong>of</strong> X, is a unique length-minimising piecewisegeodesic curve which is entirely c<strong>on</strong>tained in the seams <strong>of</strong> the hyperbolic pairs <strong>of</strong> pants and the<strong>curves</strong> γ 1 , γ 2 , . . . , γ 3g−3+n . The twist parameter τ k is the signed distance that this curve travelsal<strong>on</strong>g γ k , according to the following sign c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>.positive twist parameternegative twist parameterFor further details, <strong>on</strong>e can c<strong>on</strong>sult Thurst<strong>on</strong>’s book [54], where he notes the following.“That a twist parameter takes values in R, rather than S 1 , tends to be a c<strong>on</strong>fusing issue,because twist parameters that are the same modulo 1 result in surfaces that are isometric.But, remember, to determine a point in Teichmüller space we need to c<strong>on</strong>sider how manytimes the leg <strong>of</strong> the pajama suit is twisted before it fits <strong>on</strong>to the baby’s foot.”More prosaically, the length parameters and the twist parameters modulo 1 are sufficient torec<strong>on</strong>struct the hyperbolic structure <strong>on</strong> X. However, to recover the marking as well, it is necessaryto c<strong>on</strong>sider the twist parameters as elements <strong>of</strong> R. So there is a <strong>on</strong>e-to-<strong>on</strong>e corresp<strong>on</strong>dencebetween marked hyperbolic surfaces and their associated length and twist parameters, whichwe refer to as Fenchel–Nielsen coordinates.Theorem 1.24. The Fenchel–Nielsen map FN : T g,n (L) → R 3g−3+n+ × R 3g−3+n , which associates toa marked hyperbolic surface the length and twist parameters, is a bijecti<strong>on</strong>. In fact, if Teichmüller spaceis endowed with its natural topology, then the map is a homeomorphism.


30 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>There is clearly a projecti<strong>on</strong> map T g,n (L) → M g,n (L) given by forgetting the marking. In fact,we obtain the <strong>moduli</strong> space as a quotient <strong>of</strong> Teichmüller space by a group acti<strong>on</strong>. C<strong>on</strong>sider themapping class groupMod g,n = Diff + (S g,n )/Diff + 0 (S g,n),where Diff + (S g,n ) is the group <strong>of</strong> orientati<strong>on</strong> preserving diffeomorphisms fixing the boundariesand Diff + 0 (S g,n) is the normal subgroup c<strong>on</strong>sisting <strong>of</strong> those diffeomorphisms isotopic to theidentity. There is a natural acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the mapping class group <strong>on</strong> Teichmüller space describedas follows: if [φ] is an element <strong>of</strong> Mod g,n , then [φ] sends the marked hyperbolic surface (X, f )to the marked hyperbolic surface (X, f ◦ φ).Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.25. The acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> Mod g,n <strong>on</strong> T g,n (L) is properly disc<strong>on</strong>tinuous, though not necessarilyfree. Therefore, the quotient M g,n (L) = T g,n (L) / Mod g,n is an orbifold.Compactificati<strong>on</strong> and symplectificati<strong>on</strong>Earlier, we described the Deligne–Mumford compactificati<strong>on</strong> M g,n , obtained by c<strong>on</strong>sideringstable algebraic <strong>curves</strong>. It should be noted that there is an analogous c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> in the hyperbolicsetting, where a node <strong>of</strong> an algebraic curve corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to degenerating the length <strong>of</strong>a simple closed curve <strong>on</strong> a hyperbolic surface to zero. In fact, <strong>on</strong>e can c<strong>on</strong>struct T g,n (L), theTeichmüller space <strong>of</strong> marked stable hyperbolic surfaces, in the following way. Define a stablehyperbolic surface <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) to be a pair (X, M) where X is a surface <strong>of</strong> genus g with npunctures, M is a collecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> disjoint simple closed <strong>curves</strong> <strong>on</strong> X and X \ M is endowed witha finite area hyperbolic metric. Again, we refer to a diffeomorphism f : S g,n → X as a markingand define the compactified Teichmüller space{T g,n (L) = (X, M, f )∣}/f is a marking <strong>of</strong> a stable hyperbolic surface (X, M) <strong>of</strong>∼genus g with n boundaries <strong>of</strong> lengths L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L nwhere (X, M, f ) ∼ (Y, N, g) if and <strong>on</strong>ly if there exists a homeomorphism φ : X → Y such thatφ(M) = N, φ restricted to X \ M is an isometry, and φ ◦ f is isotopic to g <strong>on</strong> each c<strong>on</strong>nectedcomp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> S g,n \ f −1 (M). Once again, the mapping class group acts <strong>on</strong> the compactifiedTeichmüller space and <strong>on</strong>e may define a compactificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n (L) asM g,n (L) = T g,n (L)/Mod g,n .The <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n (0) can be can<strong>on</strong>ically identified with M g,n by the uniformisati<strong>on</strong> theorem.When L ̸= 0, the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n (L) does not possess a natural complex structure.However, by the work <strong>of</strong> Wolpert [61], the Fenchel–Nielsen coordinates do induce a real analyticstructure. For more informati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the compactificati<strong>on</strong> and real analytic structure <strong>of</strong><strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces, the reader is encouraged to c<strong>on</strong>sult the references [1, 3].


1.4. Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 31The Teichmüller space T g,n (L) can be endowed with the can<strong>on</strong>ical symplectic formω =3g−3+n∑ dl k ∧ dτ kk=1using the Fenchel–Nielsen coordinates. Although this is a rather trivial statement, a deep fact isthat this form is invariant under the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the mapping class group. Therefore, ω descendsto a symplectic form <strong>on</strong> the quotient, namely the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n (L). This is referred to asthe Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form and we will also denote it by ω. Its existence allows us touse the techniques <strong>of</strong> symplectic geometry in the study <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>. Wolpert [61] used thereal analytic structure <strong>on</strong> M g,n (L) to show that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> form extends smoothly to aclosed form <strong>on</strong> M g,n (L). In the particular case L = 0, he showed that this extensi<strong>on</strong> defines acohomology class [ω] ∈ H 2 (M g,n , R) which satisfies the following.Theorem 1.26. The de Rham cohomology class <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form and the characteristicclass κ 1 are related by the equati<strong>on</strong> [ω] = 2π 2 κ 1 ∈ H 2 (M g,n , R).Note that for all values <strong>of</strong> L, the <strong>spaces</strong> M g,n (L) are diffeomorphic to each other, but not necessarilysymplectomorphic, when endowed with the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic structure. Itis therefore natural to ask how the symplectic structure varies as L varies, a topic which wediscuss in the next secti<strong>on</strong>.1.4 Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesPowering up the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form, <strong>on</strong>e obtains the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding volume formω 3g−3+n(3g − 3 + n)! = dl 1 ∧ dτ 1 ∧ dl 2 ∧ dτ 2 ∧ . . . ∧ dl 3g−3+n ∧ dτ 3g−3+n .Of course, Teichmüller space has infinite volume with respect to this form. However, the acti<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> the mapping class group is such that the volume <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space is finite. Thisfollows from the fact that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form can be extended smoothly to thecompactificati<strong>on</strong>. Therefore, define V g,n (L) to be the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume <strong>of</strong> M g,n (L). Notethat when dealing with volumes, <strong>on</strong>e need not worry about the compactificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong>space since, by Theorem 1.2, the boundary divisor has positive codimensi<strong>on</strong>. In particular, itis not necessary for us to c<strong>on</strong>sider an extensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form to theboundary.


32 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>The following is a brief selecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the early results c<strong>on</strong>cerning Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. 6Wolpert [58, 59] proved that V 0,4 (0) = 2π 2 , V 1,1 (0) = π212 and V g,n(0) = q(2π 2 ) 3g−3+nfor some rati<strong>on</strong>al number q. This last fact is a corollary <strong>of</strong> Theorem 1.26, from which wededuce that q = ∫ M g,nκ 3g−3+n1.Penner [50] proved that V 1,2 (0) = π44 .Zograf [63, 62] proved that V 0,5 (0) = 10π 4 and that V 0,n (0) = (2π2 ) n−3a n , where a 3 = 1and for n ≥ 4,a n = 1 2n−3∑k=1k(n − k − 2)n − 1Näätänen and Nakanishi [40, 41] proved that(n−3)!( )( )n − 4 nak − 1 k + 1 k+2 a n−k .V 0,4 (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 4 ) = 1 2 (L2 1 + L2 2 + L2 3 + L2 4 + 4π2 ) and V 1,1 (L 1 ) = 148 (L2 1 + 4π2 ).Much <strong>of</strong> the early work in this directi<strong>on</strong> was rooted in algebraic geometry, where there is noanalogue to the length <strong>of</strong> a boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent. Hence, the results <strong>of</strong>ten c<strong>on</strong>cerned the c<strong>on</strong>stantV g,n (0) rather than the more general volume functi<strong>on</strong> V g,n (L). However, Näätänen andNakanishi’s work suggests that this latter problem yields nice results, at least for <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong><strong>of</strong> complex dimensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e. In fact, they showed that V 1,1 (L 1 ) and V 0,4 (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 4 ) are bothpolynomials in the boundary lengths. That this is the case for all <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesV g,n (L) was proven by Mirzakhani in two distinct ways [33, 34]. The remainder <strong>of</strong> this secti<strong>on</strong>is dedicated to giving the essential ideas, results and pro<strong>of</strong>s involved in Mirzakhani’s work.Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>One <strong>of</strong> the main obstacles in calculating the volume <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space is the fact that theFenchel–Nielsen coordinates do not behave nicely under the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the mapping class group.In particular, there is no c<strong>on</strong>crete descripti<strong>on</strong> for a fundamental domain <strong>of</strong> M g,n (L) in T g,n (L)for general values <strong>of</strong> g and n. Mirzakhani had the idea <strong>of</strong> unfolding the integral required tocalculate the volume <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space to a cover over the <strong>moduli</strong> space. In general, c<strong>on</strong>sidera covering π : X 1 → X 2 , let dv 2 be a volume form <strong>on</strong> X 2 , and let dv 1 = π ∗ dv 2 be the pull-back6 When comparing these results with the original sources, there may be some discrepancy due to two issues. First,there are distinct normalisati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form which differ by a factor <strong>of</strong> two. We have scaledthe results, where appropriate, to corresp<strong>on</strong>d with the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form defined earlier. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, <strong>on</strong>emust treat the special cases <strong>of</strong> V 1,1 (L 1 ) and V 2,0 with some care. This is due to the fact that every point <strong>on</strong> M 1,1 (L 1 ) andM 2,0 is an orbifold point, generically with orbifold group Z 2 . As a result, the statement <strong>of</strong> certain theorems holds true<strong>on</strong>ly if <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>siders V 1,1 (L 1 ) and V 2,0 as orbifold volumes — in other words, half <strong>of</strong> the true volumes. The upshot isthat <strong>on</strong>e should not be alarmed if results c<strong>on</strong>cerning Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes from different sources differ by a factorwhich is a power <strong>of</strong> two.


1.4. Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 33volume form <strong>on</strong> X 1 . If π is a finite covering, then for a functi<strong>on</strong> f : X 1 → R, <strong>on</strong>e can c<strong>on</strong>siderthe push-forward functi<strong>on</strong> π ∗ f : X 2 → R defined by(π ∗ f )(x) = ∑ f (y).y∈π −1 (x)In fact, even if π is an infinite covering, then the push-forward may still exist provided f issufficiently well-behaved. The main reas<strong>on</strong> for c<strong>on</strong>sidering this setup is the fact that∫∫f dv 1 = (π ∗ f ) dv 2 .X 1 X 2Therefore, we wish to find a covering π : ˜M g,n (L) → M g,n (L) such that the former space iseasier to integrate over than the latter. A natural candidate is T g,n (L)/G, where G is a subgroup<strong>of</strong> the mapping class group Mod g,n . So, to calculate the volume V g,n (L) in this way, it is desirableto express the c<strong>on</strong>stant functi<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> M g,n (L) as the sum <strong>of</strong> push-forward functi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the typedescribed above. The main tool used by Mirzakhani to carry out this integrati<strong>on</strong> scheme was ageneralisati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the following “remarkable identity” discovered by McShane [30].Theorem 1.27 (McShane’s Identity). On a cusped hyperbolic torus,∑γ11 + e −l(γ)/2 = 1 2 ,where the sum is over all simple closed geodesics and l(γ) denotes the length <strong>of</strong> γ.Mirzakhani [33] was able to extend McShane’s identity to arbitrary hyperbolic surfaces withgeodesic boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents in the following way.Theorem 1.28 (Generalised McShane’s Identity). On a hyperbolic surface with n geodesic boundarycomp<strong>on</strong>ents β 1 , β 2 , . . . , β n <strong>of</strong> lengths L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n , respectively,∑(α 1 ,α 2 )D(L 1 , l(α 1 ), l(α 2 )) +n∑k=2∑ R(L 1 , L k , l(γ)) = L 1 .γHere, the first summati<strong>on</strong> is over unordered pairs (α 1 , α 2 ) <strong>of</strong> simple closed geodesics which bound a pair<strong>of</strong> pants with β 1 , while the sec<strong>on</strong>d summati<strong>on</strong> is over simple closed geodesics γ which bound a pair <strong>of</strong>pants with β 1 and β k . The functi<strong>on</strong>s D : R 3 → R and R : R 3 → R are defined as follows.D(x, y, z) = 2 log(e 2 x + e y+z2e −x2 + e y+z2)R(x, y, z) = x − log(coshy2cosh y 2x+z+ cosh2x−z+ cosh2)This identity allows <strong>on</strong>e to express the c<strong>on</strong>stant functi<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> M g,n (L) as a sum <strong>of</strong> push-forwardfuncti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> coverings <strong>of</strong> the form M γ g,n(L) → M g,n (L). Here, γ is a multicurve <strong>on</strong> the sur-


34 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>face S g,n and M γ g,n(L) = T g,n (L)/G, where G ⊆ Mod g,n is the stabiliser <strong>of</strong> the multicurve γ.Since these coverings are inherently easier to integrate over, it is possible to unfold the integralrequired to calculate the volume <strong>of</strong> M g,n (L). The final result is the following recursive formuladue to Mirzakhani [33].Theorem 1.29 (Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>). The Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfy the following formula.2 ∂∂L 1L 1 V g,n (L) =∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00+ ∑g 1 +g 2 =g+I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]n ∫ ∞∑k=20xy H(x + y, L 1 ) V g−1,n+1 (x, y, ̂L) dx dy∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00xy H(x + y, L 1 ) V g1 ,|I 1 |+1(x, L I1 ) V g2 ,|I 2 |+1(y, L I2 ) dx dyx[H(x, L 1 + L k ) + H(x, L 1 − L k )] V g,n−1 (x, ̂L k ) dxWe have used ̂L = (L 2 , L 3 , . . . , L n ), ̂L k = (L 2 , . . . , ̂L k , . . . , L n ) and L I = (L i1 , L i2 , . . . , L im ) for I ={i 1 , i 2 , . . . , i m }. Furthermore, the functi<strong>on</strong> H : R 2 → R is defined byH(x, y) =11 + e x+y2+11 + e x−y2.Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> expresses V g,n (L) in terms <strong>of</strong> certain integral transforms <strong>of</strong> volumescorresp<strong>on</strong>ding to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> with smaller negative Euler characteristic. Therefore, the calculati<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> any Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume can be reduced to the base casesV 0,1 (L 1 ) = 0, V 0,2 (L 1 , L 2 ) = 0, V 0,3 (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 ) = 1 and V 1,1 (L 1 ) = 148 (L2 1 + 4π2 ).Without going into the details <strong>of</strong> the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>, we can at least understandhow the three terms arise. Philosophically, the mechanism behind Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> isbased <strong>on</strong> removing pairs <strong>of</strong> pants from S g,n which c<strong>on</strong>tain the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent β 1 . Thethree types <strong>of</strong> surface which can result areS g−1,n+1 when the pair <strong>of</strong> pants is bound by β 1 and two interior simple closed <strong>curves</strong> andits removal leaves a c<strong>on</strong>nected surface;S g1 ,n 1 +1 ∪ S g2 ,n 2 +1 when the pair <strong>of</strong> pants is bound by β 1 and two interior simple closed<strong>curves</strong> and its removal leaves a disc<strong>on</strong>nected surface; orS g,n−1 when the pair <strong>of</strong> pants is bound by β 1 , another boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent β k and aninterior simple closed curve.These corresp<strong>on</strong>d precisely to the three terms <strong>on</strong> the right hand side <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>.


1.4. Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 35In practice, Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> requires <strong>on</strong>e to be able to integrate expressi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the form∫ ∞0x 2k−1 H(x, t) dxand∫ ∞ ∫ ∞0 0x 2a−1 y 2b−1 H(x + y, t) dx dy,where k, a and b are positive integers. It is straightforward to prove thatwhere∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00∫ ∞0x 2k−1 H(x, t) dx = F 2k−1 (t)x 2a−1 y 2b−1 H(x + y, t) dx dy =F 2k−1 (t) = (2k − 1)!k∑i=0(2a − 1)!(2b − 1)!F(2a + 2b − 1)! 2a+2b−1 (t)ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)t 2k−2i .(2k − 2i)!The following equati<strong>on</strong>s give the explicit computati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> F 1 (t), F 3 (t), F 5 (t) and F 7 (t).F 1 (t) = t2 2 + 2π23F 3 (t) = t4 4 + 2π2 t 2 + 28π415F 5 (t) = t6 6 + 10π2 t 4+ 56π4 t 23 3F 7 (t) = t8 8 + 14π2 t 63+ 196π4 t 43+ 992π663+ 992π6 t 23+ 4064π815Observe that F 2k−1 (t) is an even polynomial <strong>of</strong> degree 2k in t and that the coefficient <strong>of</strong> t 2mis a rati<strong>on</strong>al multiple <strong>of</strong> π 2k−2m . The following calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V 1,2 (L 1 , L 2 ) dem<strong>on</strong>strates howMirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> can be used to compute Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes.Example 1.30. Only two <strong>of</strong> the three terms <strong>on</strong> the right hand side are n<strong>on</strong>-zero, <strong>on</strong>e depending<strong>on</strong> V 0,3 and the other <strong>on</strong> V 1,1 . This corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to the fact that removing a pair <strong>of</strong> pants fromthe surface S 1,2 which c<strong>on</strong>tains at least <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents must leave either S 0,3or S 1,1 .==2 ∂ L∂L 1 V 1,2 (L 1 , L 2 )1∫ ∞ ∫ ∞0 0∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00xy H(x + y, L 1 ) V 0,3 (x, y, L 2 ) dx dy +∫ ∞∫ ∞xy H(x + y, L 1 ) dx dy + x[H(x, L 1 + L 2 ) + H(x, L 1 − L 2 )]00x[H(x, L 1 + L 2 ) + H(x, L 1 − L 2 )] V 1,1 (x) dx( x 2 + 4π 2 )dx48= 1 6 F 3(L 1 ) + 1 48 F 3(L 1 + L 2 ) + 148 F 3(L 1 − L 2 ) + π212 F 1(L 1 + L 2 ) + π212 F 1(L 1 − L 2 )= 5L4 196 + L2 1 L2 216 + L4 296 + π2 L 2 1+ π2 L 2 2+ π42 6 2


36 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>Now integrate with respect to L 1 and divide by 2L 1 to obtain the desired volume.V 1,2 (L 1 , L 2 ) = L4 1192 + L2 1 L2 296 + L4 2192 + π2 L 2 112 + π2 L 2 212 + π44= 1192 (L2 1 + L2 2 + 4π2 )(L 2 1 + L2 2 + 12π2 )A simple though important corollary <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> is the following result.Corollary 1.31. The volume V g,n (L) is an even symmetric polynomial <strong>of</strong> degree 6g − 6 + 2n in theboundary lengths L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n . Furthermore, the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn is a rati<strong>on</strong>al multiple<strong>of</strong> π 6g−6+2n−2|α| .The symmetry <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) follows immediately from the symmetry <strong>of</strong> the boundary labels. Theremainder <strong>of</strong> the statement can be proven by inducti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the negative Euler characteristic.That the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes are polynomials is a rather amazing fact. Actually, we willsee that the technique <strong>of</strong> symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> can be used to prove that their coefficients storeinteresting informati<strong>on</strong>.Volumes and symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong>Symplectic geometry has its origins in the mathematical formulati<strong>on</strong> and generalisati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> thephase space <strong>of</strong> a classical mechanical system. 7 For a l<strong>on</strong>g time, physicists have taken advantage<strong>of</strong> the fact that when a symmetry group <strong>of</strong> dimensi<strong>on</strong> n acts <strong>on</strong> a system, then the number <strong>of</strong>degrees <strong>of</strong> freedom for the positi<strong>on</strong>s and momenta can be reduced by 2n. The analogous mathematicalphenomen<strong>on</strong> is known as symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong>. More precisely, c<strong>on</strong>sider a symplecticmanifold (M, ω) <strong>of</strong> dimensi<strong>on</strong> 2d with aT n = S 1 × S 1 × . . . × S 1} {{ }n timesacti<strong>on</strong> that preserves the symplectic form. Furthermore, suppose that this acti<strong>on</strong> is the Hamilt<strong>on</strong>ianflow for the moment map µ : M → R n and that 0 is a regular value <strong>of</strong> the moment map.Note that T n must act <strong>on</strong> the level sets <strong>of</strong> µ, so <strong>on</strong>e can defineM 0 = µ −1 (0)/T n .The main theorem <strong>of</strong> symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> states that M 0 is a symplectic manifold <strong>of</strong> dimensi<strong>on</strong>2d − 2n with respect to the unique 2-form ω 0 which satisfies i ∗ ω = π ∗ ω 0 , where π : µ −1 (0) →M 0 and i : µ −1 (0) → M are the natural projecti<strong>on</strong> and inclusi<strong>on</strong> maps. In fact, since 0 is a7 For a reas<strong>on</strong>ably elementary introducti<strong>on</strong> to symplectic geometry, we recommend the text [7].


1.4. Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 37regular value, there exists an ε > 0 such that all a ∈ R n satisfying |a| < ε are also regularvalues. So it is possible to define symplectic manifolds (M a , ω a ) for all such a.If we think <strong>of</strong> the T n acti<strong>on</strong> as n commuting circle acti<strong>on</strong>s, then the kth copy <strong>of</strong> S 1 induces acircle bundle S k <strong>on</strong> M 0 . Let the first Chern class <strong>of</strong> this circle bundle be denoted by c 1 (S k ) = φ k .Then the variati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the symplectic form ω 0 is described by the following result [19].Theorem 1.32. For a = (a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a n ) sufficiently close to 0, (M a , ω a ) is symplectomorphic to M 0equipped with a symplectic form whose cohomology class is equal to [ω 0 ] + a 1 φ 1 + a 2 φ 2 + · · · + a n φ n .This then allows us to c<strong>on</strong>sider the variati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the volume.Corollary 1.33. For a = (a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a n ) sufficiently close to 0, the volume <strong>of</strong> (M a , ω a ) is a polynomialin a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a n <strong>of</strong> degree d = 1 2 dim(M a) given by the formula∑|α|+m=d∫M 0φ α 11 φα 22 . . . φα nα!m!n ω ma α 11 aα 22 . . . aα nn .We now retrace Mirzakhani’s steps in c<strong>on</strong>structing a setup in which these techniques will produceWeil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. Doing so will provide a sec<strong>on</strong>d pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the fact that V g,n (L) is apolynomial and, furthermore, show that its coefficients store interesting informati<strong>on</strong> — namely,intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n .C<strong>on</strong>sider the space{̂M g,n = (X, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n )∣X is a genus g hyperbolic surface with n geodesic boundarycomp<strong>on</strong>ents β 1 , β 2 , . . . , β n and p k ∈ β k for all k}and note that there is a T n = S 1 × S 1 × . . . × S 1 acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the space, where the kth copy <strong>of</strong> S 1moves the point p k al<strong>on</strong>g the boundary β k . This acti<strong>on</strong> is the Hamilt<strong>on</strong>ian flow for the momentmap µ : ̂M g,n → R n defined by µ(X, p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n ) = ( 1 2 L2 1 , 1 2 L2 2 , . . . , 1 2 L2 n), where L k denotesthe length <strong>of</strong> the geodesic boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent β k .Fix a tuple γ = (γ 1 , γ 2 , . . . , γ n ) <strong>of</strong> disjoint simple closed <strong>curves</strong> <strong>on</strong> S g,2n such that γ k boundsa pair <strong>of</strong> pants with the boundaries labelled 2k − 1 and 2k. Then g ∈ Mod g,2n acts <strong>on</strong> γ bygγ = (gγ 1 , gγ 2 , . . . , gγ n ). Now defineM γ g,2n = {(X, η 1, η 2 , . . . , η n ) | X ∈ M g,2n (0) and (η 1 , η 2 , . . . , η n ) ∈ Mod g,2n · γ}or, equivalently, c<strong>on</strong>sider M γ g,2n = T g,2n(0)/G where G = ⋂ Stab(γ k ) ⊆ Mod g,2n . Since theWeil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form <strong>on</strong> T g,2n (0) is invariant under the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> Mod g,2n , it is alsoinvariant under G. Therefore, it descends to a symplectic form <strong>on</strong> M γ g,2n .There is a natural map f : ̂M g,n → M γ g,2n . Simply take (X, p 1, p 2 , . . . , p n ) where X ∈ M g,n (L)


38 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>and, to the kth boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent, glue in a pair <strong>of</strong> pants with two cusps labelled 2k − 1 and2k and a boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> length L k . Of course, this can be d<strong>on</strong>e in infinitely many waysand we choose the unique way such that the seam from the cusp labelled 2k meets the point p k .The map f can be used to pull back the symplectic form to ̂M g,n , where it is invariant under theT n -acti<strong>on</strong>. Furthermore, the can<strong>on</strong>ical map l −1 (L)/T n → M g,n (L) is a symplectomorphism,where l : ̂M g,n → R n sends a hyperbolic surface to its boundary lengths.As menti<strong>on</strong>ed earlier, the T n acti<strong>on</strong> gives rise to n circle bundles S 1 , S 2 , . . . , S n <strong>on</strong> the symplecticreducti<strong>on</strong> M g,n (0) = µ −1 (0)/T n . Mirzakhani managed to prove the following fact c<strong>on</strong>cerningthe Chern classes <strong>of</strong> these circle bundles.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.34. For k = 1, 2, . . . , n, c 1 (S k ) = ψ k ∈ H 2 (M g,n , Q).We are now ready to state and prove <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the most important results underlying this thesis.Theorem 1.35 (Mirzakhani’s theorem). The volume polynomial V g,n (L) is given by the formula(2π 2 ) m ∫ M g,nψ α 11∑ψα 22 . . . ψα n|α|+m=3g−3+n2 |α| α!m!n κ m 1L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn .Pro<strong>of</strong>. We simply apply Corollary 1.33 to the symplectic manifold ̂M g,n with the moment mapµ defined earlier. This shows that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume <strong>of</strong> M g,n (L) in a neighbourhood <strong>of</strong>0 is a polynomial in L 2 1 , L2 2 , . . . , L2 n whose coefficients are given by integrating products <strong>of</strong> Chernclasses <strong>of</strong> the circle bundles S 1 , S 2 , . . . , S n al<strong>on</strong>gside powers <strong>of</strong> the reduced symplectic form.By Theorem 1.34, these Chern classes are precisely the psi-classes. Furthermore, the reducedsymplectic form coincides with the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> form, whose cohomology class we can writeas 2π 2 κ 1 , by Theorem 1.26.We have purposefully glossed over some <strong>of</strong> the more technical details in the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem1.35. The three main issues are as follows.In actual fact, 0 is not a regular value <strong>of</strong> the moment map, so we cannot legitimatelyc<strong>on</strong>struct the symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> as proposed. However, all values away from 0 areregular, so we can form the reduced manifold M ɛ for ɛ ̸= 0. We recover the desired resultin the ɛ → 0 limit.The literature <strong>on</strong> symplectic reducti<strong>on</strong> generally does not c<strong>on</strong>sider the case <strong>of</strong> symplecticorbifolds. However, in analogy with Theorem 1.1 and Theorem 1.2, <strong>on</strong>e can get aroundsuch problems by lifting to a manifold cover. This takes a little extra care, but essentiallycauses no problems.


1.4. Volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> 39Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.34 claims that c 1 (S k ) is an element <strong>of</strong> H 2 (M g,n , Q) when it is apparent thatS k is a circle bundle over the uncompactified space M g,n (0). However, it is straightforwardto extend S k to the compactificati<strong>on</strong>.Mirzakhani’s theorem shows that V g,n (L) is a polynomial whose coefficients store informati<strong>on</strong>about the intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . In fact, all psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n canbe recovered from the top degree part <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) al<strong>on</strong>e. On the other hand, Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>shows that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes can be calculated recursively. Therefore, thesetwo theorems together provide an effective recursive algorithm to determine all psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . So it should come as little surprise that Mirzakhani was able to givea new pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture using these results. However, there are three remarkableaspects <strong>of</strong> her pro<strong>of</strong>. First, she proved Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture by directly verifying the Virasoroc<strong>on</strong>straints. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, Mirzakhani’s pro<strong>of</strong> was the first to appear which did not require the use <strong>of</strong>a matrix model. Third, and most importantly for us, her pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture is deeplyrooted in hyperbolic geometry.The basis for the new results appearing in this thesis is Mirzakhani’s theorem. In particular,it allows us to adopt the philosophy that any meaningful statement about the volume V g,n (L)gives a meaningful statement about the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and vice versa.


40 1. A gentle introducti<strong>on</strong> to <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>


Chapter 2Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s andhyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesIn this chapter, we prove the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, which take the form <strong>of</strong>relati<strong>on</strong>s between Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. Two distinct pro<strong>of</strong>s are supplied — <strong>on</strong>e arising fromalgebraic geometry and the other from Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. One striking feature <strong>of</strong> theseresults is that they are highly suggestive <strong>of</strong> a third pro<strong>of</strong>, involving the geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolicc<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. As applicati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, we show howto efficiently calculate genus 0 and genus 1 Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes and give a formula for thevolume V g,0 , a case not dealt with by Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. The chapter c<strong>on</strong>cludes with someideas <strong>on</strong> how this work may be extended.2.1 Volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>sGeneralised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>sMirzakhani’s theorem — Theorem 1.35 — asserts that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes are polynomialswhose coefficients store interesting informati<strong>on</strong>. In particular, any meaningful statementabout V g,n (L) gives a meaningful statement about the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and viceversa. Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> — Theorem 1.29 — provides an effective algorithm to calculatethese Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a numerological approach andsimply search for interesting patterns am<strong>on</strong>g the volume polynomials. These, in turn, shouldtranslate into relati<strong>on</strong>s c<strong>on</strong>cerning the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. The hopeis that packaging the intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n into the polynomial V g,n (L) may revealuseful informati<strong>on</strong> which is otherwise obscured.41


42 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesFor example, c<strong>on</strong>sider V g,1 (L) for small values <strong>of</strong> g.V 1,1 (L) = 1 48 (L2 + 4π 2 )1V 2,1 (L) =2211840 (L2 + 4π 2 )(L 2 + 12π 2 )(5L 4 + 384π 2 L 2 + 6960π 4 )1V 3,1 (L) =267544166400 (L2 + 4π 2 )(5L 12 + 2136π 2 L 10 + · · · + 152253906944π 12 )1V 4,1 (L) =1035588555767808000 (L2 + 4π 2 )(35L 18 + · · · + 24243263955499483136π 18 )From this evidence al<strong>on</strong>e, it is natural to c<strong>on</strong>jecture that V g,1 (L) always possesses a factor <strong>of</strong>L 2 + 4π 2 . This is indeed true, but also suggests that the volume polynomials exhibit interestingbehaviour when <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the arguments is evaluated at 2πi. A more thorough investigati<strong>on</strong>uncovers the following results.Theorem 2.1 (Generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfythe following relati<strong>on</strong>. 1 V g,n+1 (L, 2πi) =n ∫∑k=1L k V g,n (L) dL kTheorem 2.2 (Generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>). For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumessatisfy the following relati<strong>on</strong>.∂V g,n+1∂L n+1(L, 2πi) = 2πi(2g − 2 + n)V g,n (L)These two statements relate the volume V g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) to the volume V g,n (L) and, therefore,also relate the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 to the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n . In fact, equatingcoefficients <strong>of</strong> the top degree terms, <strong>on</strong>e recovers the string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, therebyexplaining our choice <strong>of</strong> nomenclature. At first glance, there are two notable observati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong>ecan make about these relati<strong>on</strong>s. First, their c<strong>on</strong>cise nature indicates that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumeV g,n (L) is a useful way to package intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . Sec<strong>on</strong>d, the intriguingappearance <strong>of</strong> the number 2πi suggests that there is interesting geometry lurking behind thesestatements.Three viewpointsThere are at least three possible approaches to proving the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s.1 Here, we have used the notati<strong>on</strong> ∫ L k V g,n (L) dL k to refer to the unique antiderivative <strong>of</strong> L k V g,n (L) with respect to L kwhich has zero c<strong>on</strong>stant term. A more accurate, though also more cumbersome, notati<strong>on</strong> would have been to expressthis as ∫ L k0 xV g,n (L 1 , . . . , L k−1 , x, L k+1 , . . . , L n ) dx.


2.1. Volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>s 43In the world <strong>of</strong> algebraic geometry, <strong>on</strong>e can pass from a curve in M g,n+1 to a curve inM g,n simply by forgetting the last marked point and stabilising, if necessary. This processis formalised by the forgetful morphism π : M g,n+1 → M g,n . Witten’s pro<strong>of</strong>s <strong>of</strong> thestring and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s arise from the analysis <strong>of</strong> psi-classes under pull-back via theforgetful morphism [57]. Naturally, <strong>on</strong>e would expect their generalisati<strong>on</strong>s to succumb toa similar approach. The first step is to invoke Mirzakhani’s theorem in order to translatethe generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s into equivalent statements c<strong>on</strong>cerning intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers. For our purposes, the analysis <strong>of</strong> kappa-classes under pull-back via theforgetful morphism is also required. This approach is presented in Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.2.Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> allows <strong>on</strong>e to determine all <strong>of</strong> the polynomials V g,n, (L) from asmall number <strong>of</strong> base cases. Therefore, any relati<strong>on</strong> between the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesis, in some sense, encapsulated in her recursive formula. So it should come as little surprisethat the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s follow from Mirzakhani’s results.What is interesting, however, is the nature <strong>of</strong> these pro<strong>of</strong>s and the fact that they rely <strong>on</strong>certain interesting identities am<strong>on</strong>g the Bernoulli numbers. This approach is presented inSecti<strong>on</strong> 2.3.In both the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the arguments in the volumepolynomial is evaluated at 2πi. It would be desirable to ascribe geometric meaning to thisformal evaluati<strong>on</strong>. Indeed, a general phenomen<strong>on</strong> in hyperbolic geometry is the fact thata purely imaginary length <strong>of</strong>ten corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to an angle. In this way, <strong>on</strong>e is motivated toc<strong>on</strong>sider hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces with a c<strong>on</strong>e angle approaching 2π. Therefore, we havea tantalising c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> andthe geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces.Unfortunately, it is a difficult task to make such a c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> explicit, since the geometry <strong>of</strong>hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces is not very well understood. We c<strong>on</strong>clude this chapter with somediscussi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> these difficulties and how they may possibly be overcome. This approachlargely remains work in progress but the hope is that the ideas presented may be the germfor future results.Note that these three viewpoints naturally corresp<strong>on</strong>d to three ways in which <strong>on</strong>e can passfrom a surface <strong>of</strong> type (g, n + 1) to a surface <strong>of</strong> type (g, n). When the surfaces are endowed withthe structure <strong>of</strong> algebraic <strong>curves</strong>, then the forgetful morphism allows <strong>on</strong>e to essentially remove<strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the marked points. In the hyperbolic setting, there is no analogous map which forgetsa boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent. On the other hand, <strong>on</strong>e can decrease the number <strong>of</strong> boundary comp<strong>on</strong>entsby simply removing a pair <strong>of</strong> pants. As noted earlier, this is precisely the mechanismby which Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> inductively reduces the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L). Another wayto decrease the number <strong>of</strong> boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents is to degenerate <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> them — first, from ageodesic boundary to a cusp, then from a cusp to a c<strong>on</strong>e point with c<strong>on</strong>e angle 2π.


44 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces2.2 Pro<strong>of</strong>s via algebraic geometryPull-back relati<strong>on</strong>sIn this secti<strong>on</strong>, we describe the behaviour <strong>of</strong> the psi-classes and kappa-classes under pull-backvia the forgetful morphism. These results, which appear in various references such as Arbarelloand Cornalba’s paper [2], are then used to deduce the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s.For clarificati<strong>on</strong>, we will occasi<strong>on</strong>ally use a tilde over a symbol to distinguish between analogousc<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> M g,n and those <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 . For example, ψ k denotes the kth psi-class <strong>on</strong>M g,n while ˜ψ k denotes the kth psi-class <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 .One might naively expect that ˜L k = π ∗ L k or, at the level <strong>of</strong> Chern classes, that ˜ψ k = π ∗ ψ k fork = 1, 2, . . . , n. However, this is not the case due to the fact that the morphism π : M g,n+1 →M g,n not <strong>on</strong>ly forgets the last marked point, but also stabilises the resulting curve, if necessary.So the discrepancy is, in some sense, caused by the geometry occurring at the boundary divisor<strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space. The actual behaviour <strong>of</strong> the psi-classes under pull-back via the forgetfulmorphism is given by the following result.Lemma 2.3 (Pull-back relati<strong>on</strong> for psi-classes). For k = 1, 2, . . . , n, the cohomology classes ˜ψ k ∈H 2 (M g,n+1 , Q) and ψ k ∈ H 2 (M g,n , Q) are related by the equati<strong>on</strong>˜ψ k = π ∗ ψ k + D k .Pro<strong>of</strong>. Recall that we are using the notati<strong>on</strong> D k to represent the divisor σ k (M g,n ) as well asthe corresp<strong>on</strong>ding homology class and Poincaré dual cohomology class. Away from D k , theline bundles ˜L k and π ∗ L k are identical. Therefore, we have the following isomorphism <strong>of</strong> linebundles for some value <strong>of</strong> m.˜L k∼ = π ∗ L k ⊗ O(mD k )For <strong>curves</strong> corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to points in D k , the kth marked point lies <strong>on</strong> a rigid object — namely,a copy <strong>of</strong> CP 1 with three special points. Therefore, the pull-back <strong>of</strong> ˜L k under σ k is trivial. So wehaveO = σ ∗ k ˜L k = σ ∗ k π∗ L k ⊗ σ ∗ k O(mD k) = L k ⊗ (L ∗ k )m ,from which it follows that m = 1. Here, we have used σk ∗O(D k) = L ∗ k, which holds because bothline bundles are isomorphic to N σk , the normal bundle to the embedding σ k : M g,n → M g,n+1 .Finally, we deduce that ˜L k∼ = π ∗ L k ⊗ O(D k ) and, after taking Chern classes, <strong>on</strong>e obtains thedesired result.In the previous pro<strong>of</strong>, we observed that the pull-back <strong>of</strong> ˜L k al<strong>on</strong>g σ k is trivial. It follows that˜ψ k · D k = 0, and we can combine this with the pull-back relati<strong>on</strong> for psi-classes to obtain the


2.2. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via algebraic geometry 45following equati<strong>on</strong>.˜ψ m+1k= ˜ψ k · (π ∗ ψ k + D k ) m = ˜ψ k · π ∗ ψk m = (π∗ ψ k + D k ) · π ∗ ψk m = π∗ ψ m+1k+ D k · π ∗ ψkmAnother c<strong>on</strong>sequence <strong>of</strong> ˜ψ k · D k = 0 and the pull-back relati<strong>on</strong> for psi-classes is the equati<strong>on</strong>(π ∗ ψ k + D k ) · D k = 0 or equivalently, Dk 2 = (−π∗ ψ k ) · D k . By inducti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> this identity, wededuce that D m+1k= (−π ∗ ψ k ) m · D k for all n<strong>on</strong>-negative integers m. Combining this with theequati<strong>on</strong> above yields˜ψ m+1k= π ∗ ψ m+1k+ (−1) m D m+1k.Lemma 2.4 (Pull-back relati<strong>on</strong> for kappa-classes). The cohomology classes ˜κ m ∈ H 2 (M g,n+1 , Q)and κ m ∈ H 2 (M g,n , Q) are related by the equati<strong>on</strong>˜κ m = π ∗ κ m + ψ m n+1 .Pro<strong>of</strong>. C<strong>on</strong>sider the following commutative diagram, whereM ∼ = M g,n , M x∼ = My ∼ = Mg,n+1 and M xy∼ = Mg,n+2 .All are <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> genus g <strong>curves</strong> with marked points labelled 1, 2, . . . , n. The space M xhas an extra point labelled x, the space M y has an extra point labelled y and the space M xy hastwo extra points labelled x and y. All maps are forgetful morphisms with the subscript denotingthe label <strong>of</strong> the forgotten point.M xy˜π y˜π xM xM yπ xπ y>MFrom the previous discussi<strong>on</strong>, we have the relati<strong>on</strong> ˜ψ m+1x = ˜π ∗ yψ m+1x + (−1) m D m+1xy <strong>on</strong> M xy .Here, D xy denotes the divisor corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to the image <strong>of</strong> the secti<strong>on</strong> σ x : M x → M xy , whichcoincides with the image <strong>of</strong> the secti<strong>on</strong> σ y : M y → M xy . Now use the forgetful morphism ˜π xto push this relati<strong>on</strong> down to M y and obtain ˜π x∗ ˜ψ x m+1 = ˜π x∗ ˜π yψ ∗ x m+1 + (−1) m ˜π x∗ Dxym+1 . Fromthe equality <strong>of</strong> ψ n+1 and the twisted Euler class, we have the following.˜κ m = ˜π x∗ ˜π yψ ∗ x m+1 + (−1) m σy ∗ Dxy m = πyπ ∗ x∗ ψxm+1 + σy ∗ (−D xy ) m = πyκ ∗ m + ψym


46 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesThe first equality is a result <strong>of</strong> the fact that intersecting with D k followed by pushing down toM g,n is the same as pulling back al<strong>on</strong>g σ k . To obtain the sec<strong>on</strong>d equality, we have interchangedthe order <strong>of</strong> the push-forward and pull-back operati<strong>on</strong>s — for justificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> this step, see §6.2in [15]. The third equality uses the fact that ψ k = σ ∗ k (−D k), which follows from our observati<strong>on</strong>in the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Lemma 2.3 that σ ∗ k O(D k) = L ∗ k .In the algebro-geometric pro<strong>of</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, we will makeparticular use <strong>of</strong> Lemma 2.4 in the case m = 1 — in other words, κ 1 = π ∗ κ 1 + ψ n+1 . We alsorequire the following straightforward evaluati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the Gysin map π ∗ : H ∗ (M g,n+1 , Q) →H ∗ (M g,n , Q).π ∗ 1 = 0 π ∗ D k = 1 for k = 1, 2, . . . , n π ∗ ψ n+1 = 2g − 2 + nThe first two evaluati<strong>on</strong>s can be directly deduced from the Poincaré duality descripti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> theGysin map. The third uses the fact that ψ n+1 coincides with the twisted Euler class e, whichsatisfies 〈e, Σ〉 = −χ(Σ − ∪D k ) = 2g − 2 + n <strong>on</strong> every fibre Σ.Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>Recall that the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> states that the following relati<strong>on</strong> holds.V g,n+1 (L, 2πi) =n ∫∑k=1L k V g,n (L) dL kBy Mirzakhani’s theorem, the left hand side can be written as(2π 2 ) k ∫ Mψ α 1g,n+1 1∑ψα 22 . . . ψα n|α|+j+k=3g−2+n2 |α| 2 j α!j!k!n ψ j n+1 κk 1L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn (2πi) 2j .Set m = 3g − 2 + n − |α| and c<strong>on</strong>sider the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn in this expressi<strong>on</strong>.m(2πi)∑2j (2π 2 ) m−jj=0 2 |α| 2 j α!j!(m − j)!= (2π2 ) m2 |α| α!m!= (2π2 ) m2 |α| α!m!m∑( mj=0(−1) j j∫∫ψ α 11M ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ j n+1 κm−j 1g,n+1) ∫M g,n+1ψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ j n+1 κm−j 1M g,n+1ψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) mNow c<strong>on</strong>sider the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn <strong>on</strong> the right hand side <strong>of</strong> the generalised string


2.2. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via algebraic geometry 47equati<strong>on</strong>. Invoking Mirzakhani’s theorem again, we can express this as(2π 2 ) m2 |α| α!m!n ∫∑ ψ α 1k=1 M g,n1 . . . ψα k−1k. . . ψ α nn κ m 1 .Therefore, it suffices to show that∫ψ α 11M ψα 22 . . . ψα nn (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) m n ∫= ∑ ψ α 1g,n+1 k=1 M g,nHowever, this is a direct result <strong>of</strong> the following chain <strong>of</strong> equalities.π ∗[ψα 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) m] = π ∗[π ∗ κ m 1= κ m 1n∑ ψ α 1k=1n∏k=11 . . . ψα k−1(π ∗ ψ α kk1 . . . ψα k−1kk. . . ψ α nn κ m 1 .) ]+ D k · π ∗ ψ α k−1k. . . ψ α nnThe first equality comes about from substituting the pull-back relati<strong>on</strong>s stated as Lemma 2.3and Lemma 2.4. The sec<strong>on</strong>d equality follows from the push-pull formula, the straightforwardfact that D i · D j = 0 for i ̸= j, as well as the evaluati<strong>on</strong>s π ∗ 1 = 0 and π ∗ D k = 1.Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>Recall that the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> states that the following relati<strong>on</strong> holds.∂V g,n+1∂L n+1(L, 2πi) = 2πi(2g − 2 + n)V g,n (L)By Mirzakhani’s theorem, the left hand side can be written as(2π 2 ) k ∫ Mψ α 1g,n+1 1∑ψα 22 . . . ψα n|α|+j+k=3g−3+n2 |α| 2 j α!j!k!n ψ j+1n+1 κk 1L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn (2πi) 2j+1 .Set m = 3g − 3 + n − |α| and c<strong>on</strong>sider the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn in this expressi<strong>on</strong>.m(2πi)∑2j+1 (2π 2 ) m−j ∫j=0 2 |α| 2 j ψ α 11α!j!(m − j)! M ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ j+1n+1 κm−j 1g,n+1= 2πi(2π2 ) m2 |α| α!m!= 2πi(2π2 ) m2 |α| α!m!m∑( mj=0(−1) j j∫) ∫M g,n+1ψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ j+1n+1 κm−j 1M g,n+1ψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ n+1 (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) m


48 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesNow c<strong>on</strong>sider the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn <strong>on</strong> the right hand side <strong>of</strong> the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong>equati<strong>on</strong>. Invoking Mirzakhani’s theorem again, we can express this as2πi(2g − 2 + n)(2π 2 ) m ∫2 |α| α!m!M g,nψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn κ m 1 .Therefore, it suffices to show that∫M g,n+1ψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ n+1 (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) m = (2g − 2 + n)However, this is a direct result <strong>of</strong> the following chain <strong>of</strong> equalities.π ∗[ψα 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn ψ n+1 (κ 1 − ψ n+1 ) m] = π ∗[ψ n+1 · π ∗ κ m 1∫n∏k=1M g,nψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn κ m 1 .(π ∗ ψ α kk= (2g − 2 + n)κ1 m ψα 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn) ]+ D k · π ∗ ψ α k−1kThe first equality comes about from substituting the pull-back relati<strong>on</strong>s stated as Lemma 2.3and Lemma 2.4. The sec<strong>on</strong>d equality follows from the push-pull formula, the straightforwardfact that D i · D j = 0 for i ̸= j, as well as the evaluati<strong>on</strong> π ∗ ψ n+1 = 2g − 2 + n.2.3 Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>Bernoulli numbersThe Bernoulli numbers B 0 , B 1 , B 2 , . . . can be defined by the generating functi<strong>on</strong>xe x − 1 = ∞∑k=0B kx kk! .They have a habit <strong>of</strong> appearing in various disparate branches <strong>of</strong> mathematics, <strong>of</strong>ten unexpectedly,and the <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> is no excepti<strong>on</strong>. One <strong>of</strong> the first results enunciatingsuch a c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> was the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the orbifold Euler characteristic <strong>of</strong> M g,n , performedby Harer and Zagier [21] and also by Penner [49]. They essentially proved thatn (2g − 3 + n)!χ(M g,n ) = (−1)2g(2g − 2)! B 2g.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 1.12 gives an elegant formula relating Hodge classes to kappa-classes which als<strong>of</strong>eatures the Bernoulli numbers. They make an appearance in our work through the evaluati<strong>on</strong>s<strong>of</strong> the integrals arising from Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. These involve values <strong>of</strong> the Riemann zeta


2.3. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> 49functi<strong>on</strong> at n<strong>on</strong>-negative even integers, which are directly related to the Bernoulli numbers bythe well-known formulaζ(2k) = (−1)k+1 (2π) 2k B 2k.2(2k)!Another elementary result is the fact that, for odd k greater than 1, B k = 0. The Bernoulli numberssatisfy a myriad <strong>of</strong> other interesting relati<strong>on</strong>s, though we will <strong>on</strong>ly require the followingfacts.Lemma 2.5. The Bernoulli numbers obey the following two relati<strong>on</strong>s.(i) For every positive integer n,(ii) For every even positive integer n,n∑k=0( n + 1k)B k = 0.n( ) n + 1∑ 2 k Bk k = 0.k=0Pro<strong>of</strong>.(i) From the definiti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Bernoulli numbers, we obtain the following chain <strong>of</strong> equalities.x =( ∞∑)(x k∞∑) (B k (e x x− 1) =k ∞∑Bk!kk!k=0k=0m=1)x m=m!∞∑n=0( n∑k=0B kk!(n + 1 − k)!)x n+1Equating the coefficients <strong>of</strong> x n+1 <strong>on</strong> both sides for positive n yields the desired relati<strong>on</strong>.n∑k=0B kk!(n + 1 − k)! = 0 ⇒ n∑k=0( n + 1k)B k = 0(ii) Again, from the definiti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Bernoulli numbers, we obtain the following.2xe 2x − 1 = ∞∑k=0B k(2x) kk!⇒2xe x − 1 = ( ∞∑k=0Therefore, we have the generating functi<strong>on</strong> identity(∞x∑n ∞∑) (2B nn! = 2 k x kB kk!n=0k=02 +)2 k x kB k (e x + 1)k!∞∑m=1)x m,m!which implies∞∑n=1( )(2 − 2 n+1 x n ∞ n−1)B nn! = 2∑ ∑k B kx n .k!(n − k)!n=1 k=0


50 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesAfter shifting the index <strong>of</strong> the summati<strong>on</strong>s, we have∞∑n=0(2 − 2 n+2 x n+1 ∞)B n+1(n + 1)! = ∑n=0( n∑k=02 k B kk!(n + 1 − k)!)x n+1 ,and equating the coefficients <strong>of</strong> x n+1 <strong>on</strong> both sides for n positive and even yields the desiredrelati<strong>on</strong>.n∑k=0Lemma 2.6. For every n<strong>on</strong>-negative integer n,2 k n( )B kn + 1k!(n + 1 − k)! = 0 ⇒ ∑ 2 k Bk k = 0k=0(2∑2i − 2)(2 2j − 2)B 2i B 2j(2i)!(2j)!(2n − 2i − 2j)! = (2n − 1) (22n − 2)B 2n,(2n)!i+j≤nwhere the summati<strong>on</strong> is over ordered pairs <strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>-negative integers (i, j).Pro<strong>of</strong>. For every n<strong>on</strong>-negative integer k, define A knotati<strong>on</strong>, the result we wish to prove takes the form= (22k −2)B 2k(2k)!and E k = 1 . Given this(2k)!∑ A i A j E k = (2n − 1)A n .i+j+k=nIdentities involving c<strong>on</strong>voluti<strong>on</strong>s like this are particularly amenable to a generating functi<strong>on</strong>approach. In fact, if we define a(x) = ∑ A k x 2k and e(x) = ∑ E k x 2k , then the problem is equivalentto the identity a(x) 2 e(x) = xa ′ (x) − a(x). This can be easily verified from the explicitexpressi<strong>on</strong>sa(x) =−2xe x − e −x and e(x) = ex + e −x.2Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>Armed with the Bernoulli identities above, we will prove that the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>is a c<strong>on</strong>sequence <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. Let us start by introducing the following operators.D[·] = 2 ∂ L∂L 1 [·]1∂[·] =∂ [·]∂LLn+1 =2πin+1H 1 [·] =H k [·] =∫ ∞ ∫ ∞0 0∫ ∞0xy H(x + y, L 1 ) [·] dx dyx[H(x, L 1 + L k ) + H(x, L 1 − L k )] [·] dx


2.3. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> 51Here, the functi<strong>on</strong> H : R 2 → R is defined as in the statement <strong>of</strong> Theorem 1.29. These operatorscan be c<strong>on</strong>sidered as linear endomorphisms <strong>of</strong> the complex vector space with basis the set <strong>of</strong>m<strong>on</strong>omials in x 2 , y 2 , L 2 1 , L2 2 , L2 3, . . .. With this notati<strong>on</strong> in place, Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> can bestated asD[V g (L, L n+1 )] =H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L, L n+1 )] ++n∑k=2∑g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n+1]H k [V g (x, ̂L k , L n+1 )] + H n+1 [V g (x, ̂L)].H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]Furthermore, the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> can be stated as∂[V g (L, L n+1 )] = 2πi(2g − 2 + n)V g (L).Recall the notati<strong>on</strong> ̂L = (L 2 , L 3 , . . . , L n ), ̂L k = (L 2 , . . . , ̂L k , . . . , L n ) and L I = (L i1 , L i2 , . . . , L im ) forI = {i 1 , i 2 , . . . , i m }. Note that we have omitted the sec<strong>on</strong>d subscript <strong>of</strong> the volume polynomialswhere it is clear how many arguments are involved. For example, V g,n (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n ) may beabbreviated to V g (L), and we will c<strong>on</strong>tinue this practice for notati<strong>on</strong>al ec<strong>on</strong>omy.Observe that the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> H k <strong>on</strong> the m<strong>on</strong>omial x 2a−2 for a positive integer a can be explicitlyexpressed as follows.H k [x 2a−2 ] =∫ ∞0= (2a − 1)!= (2a − 1)!x 2a−1 [H(x, L 1 + L k ) + H(x, L 1 − L k )] dxa∑i=0a∑i=0ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)[(L(2a − 2i)! 1 + L k ) 2a−2i + (L 1 − L k ) 2a−2i ]( 2a − 2iζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(2a − 2i)!a−i∑ 2j=0ζ(2i)(2= 2(2a − 1)! ∑2i+1 − 4)(2j)!(2a − 2i − 2j)! L2j 1 L2a−2i−2j ki+j≤a2j)L 2j1 L2a−2i−2j kIt is a simple matter to verify the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> when (g, n) is equal to (0, 3) or(1, 1). The pro<strong>of</strong> now proceeds by inducti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the negative Euler characteristic 2g − 2 + n,and we start by applying the operator ∂ to both sides <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. Since ∂ and Dcommute, the left hand side becomes∂ ◦ D[V g (L, L n+1 )] = D ◦ ∂[V g (L, L n+1 )].The right hand side breaks up naturally as the sum <strong>of</strong> four terms, which we will deal with inorder. The first term gives the following, where we have made use <strong>of</strong> the fact that ∂ and H 1


52 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacescommute, as well as the inductive assumpti<strong>on</strong>.∂ ◦ H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L, L n+1 )] = H 1 ◦ ∂[V g−1 (x, y, ̂L, L n+1 )]= 2πi(2g − 3 + n)H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)]The sec<strong>on</strong>d term can be taken care <strong>of</strong> by simply c<strong>on</strong>centrating <strong>on</strong> the summati<strong>on</strong> over I 1 ⊔ I 2 .Once again, we have made use <strong>of</strong> the fact that ∂ and H 1 commute, as well as the inductiveassumpti<strong>on</strong>.⎡∂ ⎣∑I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n+1]⎤H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )] ⎦= ∑ H 1 ◦ ∂[V g1 (x, L I1 , L n+1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )] + H 1 ◦ ∂[V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 , L n+1 )]I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]= ∑ [2πi(2g 1 − 1 + |I 1 |) + 2πi(2g 2 − 1 + |I 2 |)] H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]= 2πi(2g − 3 + n) ∑ H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]The third term can be dealt with in a similar manner, using the fact that ∂ and H k commute.∂[ n∑H k [V g (x, ̂L k , L n+1 )k=2]=n∑ H k ◦ ∂[V g (x, ̂L k , L n+1 )]k=2= 2πi(2g − 3 + n)n∑k=2H k [V g (x, ̂L k )]Putting all <strong>of</strong> this together and invoking Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> again, we obtain the following.D ◦ ∂[V g (L, L n+1 )] = 2πi(2g − 3 + n)D[V g (L)] + ∂ ◦ H n+1 [V g (x, ̂L)]Now since D is invertible, the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> will follow if we can prove that∂ ◦ H n+1 [V g (x, ̂L)] = 2πiD[V g (L)].However, this is a direct corollary <strong>of</strong> the following result.Lemma 2.7. For every even polynomial P, the following relati<strong>on</strong> holds.∂ ◦ H n+1 [P(x)] = 2πiD[P(L 1 )]Pro<strong>of</strong>. By linearity, it suffices to prove the lemma for m<strong>on</strong>omials <strong>of</strong> the form x 2a , where a is a


2.3. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> 53n<strong>on</strong>-negative integer.∂ ◦ H n+1 [x 2a ] = 2πiD[L 2a1 ]We can use the explicit expressi<strong>on</strong>s for the operators ∂, D, H n+1 to state this asζ(2i)(2(2a)! ∑2i+1 − 4)(2j)!(2a + 1 − 2i − 2j)! L2j 1 (2πi)2a−2i−2j = L1 2a .i+j≤aNote that both sides <strong>of</strong> this equati<strong>on</strong> are polynomials in L 1 and that the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L1 d <strong>on</strong> theleft hand side can be written asa−d(2a)! ζ(2i)(2(2d)!∑2i+1 − 4)(2a − 2d + 1 − 2i)! (2πi)2a−2d−2i . (2.1)i=0Set m = a − d and replace the values <strong>of</strong> the Riemann zeta functi<strong>on</strong> with Bernoulli numbers toobtain(−1) m+1 (2π) 2m2m + 1( ) 2a m∑B2d 2i (2 2i − 2)i=0( 2m + 12i).Since B i (2 i − 2) = 0 for all odd positive integers i, this is equivalent to(−1) m+1 (2π) 2m ( ) 2a 2m∑( ) 2m + 1B2m + 1 2d i (2 i − 2)ii=0= (−1)m+1 (2π) 2m ( ) [ 2a2m( ) 2m + 12m + 1 2d ∑ 2 i Bi i − 2i=02m∑i=0( ]2m + 1)Bi i .The two summati<strong>on</strong>s in the latter expressi<strong>on</strong> are equal to zero by Lemma 2.5 unless m = 0.Therefore, the <strong>on</strong>ly c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> to equati<strong>on</strong> (2.1) occurs when d = a. In this case, it is easy toverify that the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2d1is indeed 1 and the result follows.Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>The method <strong>of</strong> pro<strong>of</strong> for the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> is very similar in nature to that used forthe generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>, though even more unwieldy. Rather than provide the lengthyand tedious algebraic manipulati<strong>on</strong>s, we will c<strong>on</strong>tent ourselves by stating the important steps<strong>of</strong> the pro<strong>of</strong>. We will need some further notati<strong>on</strong> before we begin.∫∫∫I k [·] = L k [·] dL k I x [·] = x[·] dx I y [·] = y[·] dyK[·] = 12L 1∫[·] dL 1 H 2πi [·] = H k [·] Lk =2πi


54 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesOnce again, these can be c<strong>on</strong>sidered as linear endomorphisms <strong>of</strong> the complex vector space withbasis the set <strong>of</strong> m<strong>on</strong>omials in x 2 , y 2 , L 2 1 , L2 2 , L2 3, . . .. With this notati<strong>on</strong>, the generalised stringequati<strong>on</strong> can be stated asnV g (L, 2πi) = ∑ I k [V g (L)].k=1The acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> H 1 <strong>on</strong> the m<strong>on</strong>omial x 2a−2 y 2b−2 for positive integers a and b can be explicitlyexpressed as follows.H 1 [x 2a−2 y 2b−2 ] =∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00x 2a−1 y 2b−1 H(x + y, L 1 ) dx dya+bζ(2i)(2= (2a − 1)!(2b − 1)! ∑2i+1 − 4)(2a + 2b − 2i)! L2a+2b−2i 1i=0Similarly, the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> H 2πi <strong>on</strong> the m<strong>on</strong>omial x 2a−2 for a positive integer a takes the followingform.H 2πi [x 2a−2 ] = H k [x 2a−2 ] Lk =2πi= 2(2a − 1)! ∑i+j≤aζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(2πi) 2a−2i−2jL 2j(2j)!(2a − 2i − 2j)!1It is a simple matter to verify the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> when (g, n) is equal to (0, 3) or(1, 1). The pro<strong>of</strong> now proceeds by inducti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the negative Euler characteristic 2g − 2 + n, andour starting point is Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>. Applying the inductive hypothesis allows us towrite the left hand side <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> in the following lengthy manner.V g (L, 2πi) = 2K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)] + 2+n∑i=2K i ◦ H i ◦ I x [V g (x, ̂L i )] +n∑k=2I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]+ ∑g 1 +g 2 =g+n n∑ ∑i=2 k=2,k̸=i∑g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]n∑k=2K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]K ◦ H 1 ◦ I k [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)]K ◦ H 1 ◦ I k [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )] + 2K ◦ H i ◦ I k [V g (x, ̂L i )] + K ◦ H 2πi [V g (x, ̂L)]n∑k=2K ◦ H 1 [V g (x, ̂L k )]Our approach from here will be to use Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> and the inductive hypothesis toexpress the right hand side <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> in a similar manner. Equating thetwo sides and performing certain cancellati<strong>on</strong>s and simplificati<strong>on</strong>s, we will arrive at a statementinvolving <strong>on</strong>ly Bernoulli numbers.


2.3. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> 55The right hand side <strong>of</strong> the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> can be expressed as follows.n∑ I k [V g (L)] = I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)] +k=1+n∑i=2+ ∑g 1 +g 2 =g+I 1 ◦ K ◦ H i [V g (x, ̂L i )] +n∑k=2I 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]n∑i,k=2,i̸=k∑g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]n∑k=2I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]K ◦ H 1 ◦ I k [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)]K ◦ H 1 ◦ I k [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]K ◦ H i ◦ I k [V g (x, ̂L i )] +n∑k=2I k ◦ K ◦ H k [V g (x, ̂L k )]After equating the previous two expressi<strong>on</strong>s and performing some mild cancellati<strong>on</strong>, the generalisedstring equati<strong>on</strong> boils down to proving the following equality.2K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)] + 2+ 2n∑k=2K ◦ H 1 [V g (x, ̂L k )] +n∑i=2∑g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]K i ◦ H i ◦ I x [V g (x, ̂L i )] + K ◦ H 2πi [V g (x, ̂L)]= I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)] + ∑ I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]+n∑k=2I k ◦ K ◦ H k [V g (x, ̂L k )] +n∑i=2I 1 ◦ K ◦ H i [V g (x, ̂L i )]At this stage, we invoke Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> yet again, after which we arrive at the followingrather cumbersome equati<strong>on</strong>.K ◦ H 2πi [K ◦ H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L i )]] L1 =x + 2+ 2n∑k=2K ◦ H 1 [V g (x, ̂L k )] +n∑i=2∑g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]K i ◦ H i ◦ I x [V g (x, ̂L i )] +K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]n∑i=2K ◦ H 2πi [K ◦ H i [V g (x, ̂L i )]] L1 =x+ ∑ K ◦ H 2πi [K ◦ H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]] L1 =x + 2K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)]g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]= I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g−1 (x, y, ̂L)] + ∑ I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [V g1 (x, L I1 )V g2 (y, L I2 )]g 1 +g 2 =gI 1 ⊔I 2 =[2,n]+n∑k=2I k ◦ K ◦ H k [V g (x, ̂L k )] +n∑i=2I 1 ◦ K ◦ H i [V g (x, ̂L i )]


56 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesHowever, by inspecti<strong>on</strong>, this equality is a direct corollary <strong>of</strong> the following two lemmas.Lemma 2.8. For every symmetric even polynomial P(x, y), the following relati<strong>on</strong> holds.2K ◦ H 1 ◦ I x [P] + K ◦ H 2πi [K ◦ H 1 [P]] L1 =x = I 1 ◦ K ◦ H 1 [P]Lemma 2.9. For every even polynomial P(x), the following relati<strong>on</strong> holds.K ◦ H k ◦ I x [P] + 2K ◦ H 1 [P] + K ◦ H 2πi [K ◦ H k [P]] L1 =x = I k ◦ K ◦ H k [P] + I 1 ◦ K ◦ H k [P]Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Lemma 2.8. By linearity, it suffices to prove the lemma for polynomials <strong>of</strong> the formx 2a y 2b + x 2b y 2a , where a and b are n<strong>on</strong>-negative integers. If we set m = a + b + 1, then thefirst term <strong>on</strong> the left hand side is2m(2a − 1)!(2b − 1)!the sec<strong>on</strong>d term <strong>on</strong> the left hand side is(2a − 1)!(2b − 1)!and the right hand side ism∑ ∑i=0 j+k≤m−im∑i=0m−1(2a − 1)!(2b − 1)! ∑i=0ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(2m + 1 − 2i)! L2m−2i 1,ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)ζ(2j)(2 2j+1 − 4)(−4π 2 ) m−i−j−k L 2k1(2m − 2i − 2j − 2k)!(2k + 1)!,ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)L 2m−2i(2m − 2i)!1.Therefore, what we wish to prove can be equivalently expressed as∑i+j+k+l=mζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)ζ(2j)(2 2j+1 − 4)(−4π 2 ) l L 2km1(2l)!(2k + 1)!= ∑i=0ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(1 − 2i)L 2m−2i(2m + 1 − 2i)!1.Note that both sides are even polynomials in L 1 <strong>of</strong> degree at most 2m, and equating the coefficients<strong>of</strong> L 2m−2d1<strong>on</strong> both sides yields∑i+j≤dζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)ζ(2j)(2 2j+1 − 4)(−4π 2 ) d−i−j = ζ(2d)(2 2d+1 − 4)(1 − 2d).(2d − 2i − 2j)!Replacing the zeta values with Bernoulli numbers leads to(2∑2i − 2)(2 2j − 2)B 2i B 2j(2i)!(2j)!(2d − 2i − 2j)! = (2d − 1) (22d − 2)B 2d,(2d)!i+j≤d


2.3. Pro<strong>of</strong>s via Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> 57which is true by Lemma 2.6.The following is very similar in nature to the previous pro<strong>of</strong> and, perhaps surprisingly, relies<strong>on</strong> the very same identity involving Bernoulli numbers.Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Lemma 2.9. By linearity, it suffices to prove the lemma for m<strong>on</strong>omials <strong>of</strong> the form x 2a ,where a is a n<strong>on</strong>-negative integer. The first term <strong>on</strong> the left hand side isζ(2i)(2(2a + 1)(2a − 1)! ∑2i+1 − 4)(2a + 2 − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 1)! L2j 1 L2a+2−2i−2jk,i+j≤a+1the sec<strong>on</strong>d term <strong>on</strong> the left hand side isa+1(2a − 1)! ∑i=0and the third term <strong>on</strong> the left hand side is(2a − 1)! ∑∑i+j≤a k+l≤j+1ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)L 2a+2−2i(2a + 3 − 2i)!1,ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)ζ(2k)(2 2k+1 − 4)(2πi) 2j+2−2k−2lL 2l1(2a − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 2 − 2k − 2l)!(2l + 1)!L2a−2i−2j k.The first term <strong>on</strong> the right hand side is(2a − 1)! ∑i+j≤aand the sec<strong>on</strong>d term <strong>on</strong> the right hand side isζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(2a − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 1)!L 2j1 L2a+2−2i−2jk2a + 2 − 2i − 2j ,ζ(2i)(2(2a − 1)! ∑2i+1 − 4)(2a − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 2)! L2j+2 1L 2a−2i−2jk.i+j≤aTherefore, what we are required to prove amounts to the following, after some tedious thoughmild simplificati<strong>on</strong>.∑i+j≤a+1+ ∑(2i + 2j)ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)(2a + 2 − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 1)! L2j 1 L2a+2−2i−2jk∑i+j≤a k+l≤j+1ζ(2i)(2 2i+1 − 4)ζ(2k)(2 2k+1 − 4)(2πi) 2j+2−2k−2lL 2l1(2a − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 2 − 2k − 2l)!(2l + 1)!L2a−2i−2j kζ(2i)(2= ∑2i+1 − 4)(2a − 2i − 2j)!(2j + 2)! L2j+2 1L 2a−2i−2jki+j≤a


58 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesNote that both sides <strong>of</strong> the equati<strong>on</strong> are even polynomials in L 1 and L k with degree at most 2a +2. Now equate the coefficient <strong>of</strong> L 2m−2d1L 2a+2−2mkand note that to obtain a n<strong>on</strong>-zero c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong><strong>on</strong> both sides, we require 0 ≤ d ≤ m.=2mζ(2d)(2 2d+1 − 4)(2a + 2 − 2m)!(2m − 2d + 1)! + ζ(2i)(2∑2i+1 − 4)ζ(2k)(2 2k+1 − 4)(2πi) 2d−2i−2k(2a + 2 − 2m)!(2d − 2i − 2k)!(2m − 2d + 1)!i+k≤dζ(2d)(2 2d+1 − 4)(2a + 2 − 2m)!(2m − 2d)!A little rearrangement yields the equati<strong>on</strong>ζ(2i)(2∑2i+1 − 4)ζ(2k)(2 2k+1 − 4)(2πi) 2d−2i−2k(2d − 2i − 2k)!i+k≤dOnce again, replacing the zeta values with Bernoulli numbers leads to= ζ(2d)(2 2d+1 − 4)(1 − 2d).which is true by Lemma 2.6.(2∑2i − 2)(2 2j − 2)B 2i B 2j(2i)!(2j)!(2d − 2i − 2j)! = (2d − 1) (22d − 2)B 2d,(2d)!i+j≤d2.4 Applicati<strong>on</strong>s and extensi<strong>on</strong>sSmall genus Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesThe generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s are insufficient to recover all <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>volumes. However, they do uniquely determine the volume polynomials in genus 0 and 1,given the base cases V 0,3 (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 ) = 1 and V 1,1 (L 1 ) = 148 (L2 1 + 4π2 ). The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> this facthinges <strong>on</strong> the following lemma.Lemma 2.10.(i) A symmetric polynomial P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) <strong>of</strong> degree less than n is uniquely determined by theevaluati<strong>on</strong> P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n−1 , c) for any c ∈ C.(ii) A symmetric polynomial P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) <strong>of</strong> degree less than or equal to n is uniquely determinedby the evaluati<strong>on</strong>s P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n−1 , c) and ∂P∂x n(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n−1 , d) for any c, d ∈ C.Pro<strong>of</strong>.(i) Suppose that P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) and Q(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) are symmetric polynomials <strong>of</strong> degree


2.4. Applicati<strong>on</strong>s and extensi<strong>on</strong>s 59less than n which have the same evaluati<strong>on</strong> at x n = c. Then P − Q vanishes <strong>on</strong> the hyperplanedefined by the equati<strong>on</strong> x n = c and it follows that x n − c | P − Q. By symmetry, wededuce that (x 1 − c)(x 2 − c) . . . (x n − c) | P − Q, and since P − Q has degree less than n, itmust be the case that P = Q.(ii) Suppose that P(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) and Q(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) are symmetric polynomials <strong>of</strong> degreeless than or equal to n which have the same evaluati<strong>on</strong> at x n = c. From the previousdiscussi<strong>on</strong>, we have (x 1 − c)(x 2 − c) . . . (x n − c) | P − Q, and it follows thatP(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) = Q(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) + a(x 1 − c)(x 2 − c) . . . (x n − c)for some a ∈ C. Taking the partial derivative <strong>of</strong> this equati<strong>on</strong> with respect to x n andsubstituting x n = d yields∂P∂x n(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n−1 , d) = ∂Q∂x n(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n−1 , d) + a(x 1 − c)(x 2 − c) . . . (x n−1 − c).So if∂x ∂Pnand ∂Q∂x nthat P = Q.Theorem 2.11.have the same evaluati<strong>on</strong> at x n = d, then a = 0 and it must be the case(i) The volume V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) is uniquely determined from V 0,n (L) and the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>for n ≥ 3.(ii) The volume V 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) is uniquely determined from V 1,n (L), the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong>,and the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong> for n ≥ 1.Pro<strong>of</strong>.(i) Note that V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) is a symmetric polynomial in the variables L 2 1 , L2 2 , . . . , L2 n+1 <strong>of</strong>degree n − 2. Therefore, by Lemma 2.10, it is uniquely determined from its evaluati<strong>on</strong> atL n+1 = −4π 2 or equivalently,V 0,n+1 (L, 2πi).However, this is given by the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> in terms <strong>of</strong> V 0,n (L).(ii) Note that V 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) is a symmetric polynomial in the variables L 2 1 , L2 2 , . . . , L2 n+1 <strong>of</strong>degree n + 1. Therefore, by Lemma 2.10, it is uniquely determined from its evaluati<strong>on</strong> atL 2 n+1 = −4π2 as well as the evaluati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> its partial derivative at L n+1 = −4π 2 . However,these can be expressed asV 1,n+1 (L, 2πi)and1 ∂V 1,n+1(L, 2πi)4πi ∂L n+1


60 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesrespectively, both <strong>of</strong> which are given by the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s interms <strong>of</strong> V 1,n (L).Theorem 2.11 can be used to produce an effective algorithm which computes V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 )from V 0,n (L) and V 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) from V 1,n (L). For example, see Appendix A.2 for a simpleMaple routine which performs the former <strong>of</strong> these two tasks. Empirically, these algorithmsseem to compute the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes in genus 0 and 1 much faster than implementingMirzakhani’s recursive formula. This is to be expected, since the computati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 )using Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> requires knowledge <strong>of</strong> the volumes V 0,m (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L m ) for allm ≤ n. Similarly, the computati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> V 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) using Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> requiresknowledge <strong>of</strong> the volumes V 0,m (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L m ) for all m ≤ n + 1 and V 1,m (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L m ) forall m ≤ n. Therefore, we see that <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the strengths <strong>of</strong> the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong>equati<strong>on</strong>s is their inherent simplicity.Closed hyperbolic surfacesThere is a variety <strong>of</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, calculati<strong>on</strong>s and theorems c<strong>on</strong>cerning the <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>M g,n or M g,n which do not apply when n = 0. For example, the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> thedecorated <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n × R n + used in K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture has noanalogue in the case without marked points, punctures or boundaries. In fact, it remains an importantopen problem to find a natural cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> for M g,0 . As another example, thereis no McShane-type identity for closed hyperbolic surfaces <strong>of</strong> arbitrary genus. Thus, Mirzakhani’srecursi<strong>on</strong> has nothing to say about the volume V g,0 . However, the generalised stringand dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s do allow us to calculate V g,0 for all values <strong>of</strong> g using the following.Theorem 2.12.(i) When n = 1, the volume factorises as V g,1 (L) = (L 2 + 4π 2 )P g (L) for some polynomial P g .(ii) For g ≥ 2, we have the following formula.Pro<strong>of</strong>.V g,0 =1 ∂V g,14πi(g − 1) ∂L (2πi) = P g(2πi)g − 1(i) In the case g = 1, we have V 1,1 (L) = 148 (L2 + 4π 2 ), so the result is true by inspecti<strong>on</strong>. Forg ≥ 2, V g,1 (L) is a real polynomial which satisfies V g,1 (2πi) = 0 by the generalised stringequati<strong>on</strong>. It follows that V g,1 (L) must possess a factor <strong>of</strong> (L 2 + 4π 2 ).(ii) By the generalised dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>, we have ∂V g,1∂L (2πi) = 2πi(2g − 2)V g,0. SubstitutingV g,1 (L) = (L 2 + 4π 2 )P g (L), we obtain 4πiP g (2πi) = 2πi(2g − 2)V g,0 , which can be rearrangedto give the desired result.


2.4. Applicati<strong>on</strong>s and extensi<strong>on</strong>s 61For example, <strong>on</strong>e can calculate the following Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> closed hyperbolic surfaces.V 2,0 = 43π62160V 3,0 = 176557π121209600V 4,0 = 1959225867017π18493807104000V 5,0 = 84374265930915479π24355541114880000The case <strong>of</strong> genus two is particularly special since every genus two closed hyperbolic surfacepossesses a hyperelliptic involuti<strong>on</strong>. McShane [31] and the team <strong>of</strong> Tan, W<strong>on</strong>g and Zhang [53]have independently capitalised <strong>on</strong> this extra symmetry to produce the following McShane-typeidentity.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 2.13. If S is a genus 2 closed hyperbolic surface, then(∑ tan −1 exp − l(α)4(α,β)− l(β) )= 3π 2 2 .Here, the sum is over all ordered pairs (α, β) <strong>of</strong> disjoint simple closed geodesics <strong>on</strong> S such that α isseparating and β is n<strong>on</strong>-separating.It is possible to use this result in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> with Mirzakhani’s integrati<strong>on</strong> scheme to unfoldthe integral required to calculate V 2,0 . The result is the following expressi<strong>on</strong> for the volume.V 2,0 = 1144π∫ ∞ ∫ ∞00(xy(x 2 + 4π 2 ) tan −1 exp − x 4 − y )dx dy2Although we have not calculated the integral explicitly, we have computati<strong>on</strong>ally verified that itdoes agree with the predicted value <strong>of</strong> 43π62160to 12 significant figures. It would certainly be interestingto generalise the McShane-type identity for closed surfaces and this volume calculati<strong>on</strong>to the case <strong>of</strong> arbitrary genus.Further volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>sGiven the nature <strong>of</strong> the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, <strong>on</strong>e would expect furtherrelati<strong>on</strong>s involving the higher order derivatives <strong>of</strong> V g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) evaluated at L n+1 = 2πi.Evidence comes from the fact that the Virasoro c<strong>on</strong>straints are a sequence <strong>of</strong> relati<strong>on</strong>s for the topdegree terms <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) whose first two terms precisely encode the string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s.In recent work, Mulase and Safnuk [38] have extended the Virasoro relati<strong>on</strong>s to the full volume


62 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacespolynomials. It would be desirable to express their results in a form similar to the generalisedstring and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s. This would allow <strong>on</strong>e to determine the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesrecursively, relying <strong>on</strong> the elementary fact that the derivatives <strong>of</strong> a polynomial evaluated at apoint completely determine the polynomial. Further evidence is given by the following volumepolynomial relati<strong>on</strong> involving the sec<strong>on</strong>d derivative <strong>of</strong> V g,n+1 (L, L n+1 ).Propositi<strong>on</strong> 2.14. For 2g − 2 + n > 0, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfy the following relati<strong>on</strong>.∂ 2 V g,n+1(L, 2πi) =∂L 2 n+1[ n∑k=1L k]∂− (4g − 4 + n) V g,n (L)∂L kThis was obtained by differentiating Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> and then using the generalisedstring and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s. By taking higher derivatives <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>, <strong>on</strong>e canhope to recursively obtain further volume polynomial relati<strong>on</strong>s. However, the strength <strong>of</strong> thegeneralised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s lies in their simplicity. It is not clear that any higherderivative relati<strong>on</strong>s obtained in this way may possess this same strength. Therefore, <strong>on</strong>e wouldlike to know when the expressi<strong>on</strong> ∂k V g,n+1(L, 2πi) depends <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong> V∂L k g,n (L).n+1Hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesIn hyperbolic geometry, <strong>on</strong>e encounters the general phenomen<strong>on</strong> that a purely imaginary lengthcorresp<strong>on</strong>ds to an angle. For example, the elements <strong>of</strong> PSL 2 (R) representing translati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> distanced have trace equal to 2 cosh d 2while those representing rotati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> angle θ have trace equalto 2 cos2 θ = 2 cosh iθ 2. Note that the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s involve evaluati<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes with <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the lengths equal to 2πi. The natural geometric interpretati<strong>on</strong>for this is that the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent has degenerated to a c<strong>on</strong>e point with c<strong>on</strong>e angle2π. In this way, the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s provide a tantalising c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>between the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces.Unfortunately, the geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces is not very well understood. Many<strong>of</strong> the results c<strong>on</strong>cerning hyperbolic surfaces with geodesic boundary do not translate in anystraightforward manner to the case <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces with c<strong>on</strong>e points. The followingexample shows that there is not always a simple closed geodesic in every isotopy class <strong>of</strong> simpleclosed <strong>curves</strong>.Example 2.15. The following diagram shows a quadrilateral with three ideal vertices in thePoincaré disk model <strong>of</strong> the hyperbolic plane. It can be doubled al<strong>on</strong>g its boundary to create agenus 0 hyperbolic surface with three cusps labelled 1, 2, 3 and a c<strong>on</strong>e point labelled 4. Thedashed curve lifts to a simple closed curve γ <strong>on</strong> the surface. However, if we treat the c<strong>on</strong>e pointas a puncture, then there is no simple closed geodesic in the same isotopy class as γ.


2.4. Applicati<strong>on</strong>s and extensi<strong>on</strong>s 634132The example above dem<strong>on</strong>strates that a topological pair <strong>of</strong> pants decompositi<strong>on</strong> cannot alwaysbe isotoped to a geometric decompositi<strong>on</strong> involving hyperbolic pairs <strong>of</strong> pants with geodesicboundary. Since such decompositi<strong>on</strong>s are fundamental in the existing <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, this obstructi<strong>on</strong>is a major stumbling block in the analysis <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. However, note thatthe surface described in the example does actually allow at least <strong>on</strong>e geometric pair <strong>of</strong> pantsdecompositi<strong>on</strong>, so not all hope is lost.Many <strong>of</strong> the results c<strong>on</strong>cerning hyperbolic surfaces which generalise to the case <strong>of</strong> c<strong>on</strong>e surfacesdo so <strong>on</strong>ly when the c<strong>on</strong>e angles are at most π. As an example, c<strong>on</strong>sider the following generalisati<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> Theorem 1.28 to hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces due to Tan, W<strong>on</strong>g and Zhang [53]. They referto geodesic boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents, cusps and c<strong>on</strong>e points as geometric boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents.Furthermore, they define the complex length <strong>of</strong> a geodesic boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> length L tobe L, <strong>of</strong> a cusp to be 0 and <strong>of</strong> a c<strong>on</strong>e point with c<strong>on</strong>e angle θ to be iθ.Theorem 2.16 (Generalised McShane’s identity). C<strong>on</strong>sider a hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surface with n geometricboundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents β 1 , β 2 , . . . , β n <strong>of</strong> complex lengths L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n , respectively. If all c<strong>on</strong>eangles lie in the interval (0, π], then∑(α 1 ,α 2 )D(L 1 , l(α 1 ), l(α 2 )) +n∑k=2∑ R(L 1 , L k , l(γ)) = L 1 .γHere, the first summati<strong>on</strong> is over unordered pairs (α 1 , α 2 ) <strong>of</strong> simple closed geodesics which bound a pair<strong>of</strong> pants with β 1 , while the sec<strong>on</strong>d summati<strong>on</strong> is over simple closed geodesics γ which bound a pair <strong>of</strong>pants with β 1 and β k . The functi<strong>on</strong>s D : R 3 → R and R : R 3 → R are defined as follows.()D(x, y, z) = 4 tanh −1 sinh2xcosh2 x y+z+ exp2R(x, y, z) = 2 tanh −1 (sinh x 2 sinh y 2cosh z 2 + cosh x 2 cosh y 2In an ideal world, Mirzakhani’s results <strong>on</strong> Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes would generalise to thecase <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces with c<strong>on</strong>e points. C<strong>on</strong>sequently, <strong>on</strong>e would be able to use the intermediate<strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> M g,n+1 (L, iθ) for 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π in order to give relati<strong>on</strong>s between theintersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n+1 and the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n . This approach to provingthe generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s sheds light <strong>on</strong> these relati<strong>on</strong>s and, furthermore,)


64 2. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume relati<strong>on</strong>s and hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfacespredicts that there are others. As pointed out by Norbury, the idea <strong>of</strong> using these intermediate<strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> is reminiscent <strong>of</strong> work by Kr<strong>on</strong>heimer and Mrowka [27]. In their paper, they use<strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> anti-self-dual c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s with c<strong>on</strong>e singularities around an embedded surfacein a four-manifold to obtain informati<strong>on</strong> about intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> instant<strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong>.Unfortunately, Mirzakhani’s results simply do not extend to the case <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaceswhen the c<strong>on</strong>e angles are as large as 2π. In fact, it is presently unclear how to even definea <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces, a corresp<strong>on</strong>ding Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic formand, hence, a volume polynomial. Perhaps the correct point <strong>of</strong> view might be to c<strong>on</strong>sider thealgebraic analogue <strong>of</strong> the geometric picture. For example, a promising avenue is to analyserepresentati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the fundamental group <strong>of</strong> S g,n into PSL 2 (R) rather than hyperbolic metrics<strong>on</strong> S g,n , à la Goldman [16, 17].


Chapter 3A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’scombinatorial formulaIn this chapter, we provide a new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula via hyperbolicgeometry. This formula relates psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers with combinatorial objectsknown as ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. The starting point is Mirzakhani’s theorem, which motivates <strong>on</strong>e toc<strong>on</strong>sider the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume V g,n (L). The first step in our journeywill be to prove that the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces is homeomorphic as an orbifoldto the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. One advantage <strong>of</strong> working with this latter spaceis the fact that it possesses a natural user-friendly system <strong>of</strong> local coordinates. Next, we usethis result to determine the asymptotic behaviour <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form. Thispart <strong>of</strong> the pro<strong>of</strong> involves a careful analysis <strong>of</strong> the behaviour <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic surfaces as theirboundary lengths approach infinity. The key geometric intuiti<strong>on</strong> involved is the fact that, in thelimit, the hyperbolic surface resembles a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph after appropriate rescaling <strong>of</strong> the metric.The final piece <strong>of</strong> the puzzle is a combinatorial problem relating two determinants associatedto a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph. These results essentially show that the informati<strong>on</strong> stored in theasymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) is precisely K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula. As a whole, this workdraws together K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial approach and Mirzakhani’s hyperbolic approach toWitten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture into a coherent narrative.“I think it is said that Gauss had ten different pro<strong>of</strong>s for the law <strong>of</strong> quadratic reciprocity.Any good theorem should have several pro<strong>of</strong>s, the more the better. For two reas<strong>on</strong>s: usually,different pro<strong>of</strong>s have different strengths and weaknesses, and they generalise in differentdirecti<strong>on</strong>s: they are not just repetiti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> each other.”Sir Michael Atiyah [51]65


66 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula3.1 K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaRibb<strong>on</strong> graphs and intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbersOne <strong>of</strong> the fundamental problems c<strong>on</strong>cerning <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> is the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers, particularly those involving the psi-classes. Witten [57] c<strong>on</strong>jectured that acertain generating functi<strong>on</strong> for these numbers satisfies the KdV hierarchy, while K<strong>on</strong>tsevich [26]supplied the pro<strong>of</strong>. The main result in K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s paper is a formula which relates psi-classintersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers with combinatorial objects known as ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs.A ribb<strong>on</strong> graph is essentially the 1-skelet<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a finite cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a compact, c<strong>on</strong>nected,oriented surface. Note that such a graph may not necessarily be simple — although itmust be finite, it may have multiple edges or loops. The orientati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the surface endows eachvertex <strong>of</strong> the graph with a cyclic orientati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting there. C<strong>on</strong>versely, giventhe graph and the cyclic orientati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting at each vertex, the topologicaltype <strong>of</strong> the surface and its cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> may be recovered. This is accomplished by usingthe extra structure to thicken the graph into a surface with boundaries which may be filled withdisks to produce a closed surface. More precisely, we have the following definiti<strong>on</strong>.Definiti<strong>on</strong> 3.1. A ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) is a graph such that every vertex has degree at leastthree, there is a cyclic ordering <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting at each vertex, and the thickening <strong>of</strong>the graph is a genus g c<strong>on</strong>nected surface with n boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents labelled from 1 up to n.Given a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ, let X denote the set <strong>of</strong> its half-edges and let s 0 be the permutati<strong>on</strong><strong>on</strong> X which cyclically permutes all half-edges adjacent to the same vertex in an anticlockwisemanner. Also, let s 1 be the permutati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> X which interchanges each pair <strong>of</strong> half-edges whichtogether form an edge <strong>of</strong> the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph. The set X 0 = X/〈s 0 〉 is can<strong>on</strong>ically equivalent tothe set <strong>of</strong> vertices <strong>of</strong> Γ while the set X 1 = X/〈s 1 〉 is can<strong>on</strong>ically equivalent to the set <strong>of</strong> edges<strong>of</strong> Γ. Furthermore, if we let s 2 = s −10 s 1, then the set X 2 = X/〈s 2 〉 is can<strong>on</strong>ically equivalent tothe set <strong>of</strong> boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents <strong>of</strong> Γ. Therefore, <strong>on</strong>e can alternatively c<strong>on</strong>sider a ribb<strong>on</strong> graphto be a triple (X, s 0 , s 1 ) where X is a finite set, s 0 is a permutati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> X without fixed points ortranspositi<strong>on</strong>s and s 1 is an involuti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> X without fixed points. We also require a labelling <strong>of</strong>the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents <strong>of</strong> Γ, which is simply a bijecti<strong>on</strong> from X/〈s 2 〉 to {1, 2, . . . , n}. Definetwo ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs (X, s 0 , s 1 ) and (X ′ , s0 ′ , s′ 1) to be isomorphic if and <strong>on</strong>ly if there exists a bijecti<strong>on</strong>f : X → X ′ such that f ◦ s 0 = s0 ′ ◦ f and f ◦ s 1 = s1 ′ ◦ f . We also impose the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> that fmust preserve the labelling <strong>of</strong> the boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents. A ribb<strong>on</strong> graph automorphism is, <strong>of</strong>course, an isomorphism from a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph to itself. The set <strong>of</strong> automorphisms <strong>of</strong> a ribb<strong>on</strong>graph Γ forms a group which is denoted by Aut Γ.Example 3.2. On the left <strong>of</strong> the diagram below is a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph with two verticesand three edges. It has been drawn such that the cyclic ordering <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting


3.1. K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula 67at every vertex matches the orientati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the page, a c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong> which we will c<strong>on</strong>tinue toadopt. On the right is the thickening <strong>of</strong> the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph, which plainly shows a surface with<strong>on</strong>e boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent. Substituting V = 2, E = 3 and n = 1 into the formula for the Eulercharacteristic V − E = 2 − 2g − n yields the fact that g = 1. In fact, this is the <strong>on</strong>ly trivalentribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (1, 1), and its automorphism group has precisely six elements. In order tosee this, observe that there exists a unique automorphism which maps any fixed half-edge toany <strong>of</strong> the six half-edges in the graph.1 1The above example illustrates that, given a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph, it is possible to determine the value<strong>of</strong> n by thickening up the graph and then the value <strong>of</strong> g from an Euler characteristic calculati<strong>on</strong>.It should also be clear from the diagram why ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs are named so.Example 3.3. The diagram below depicts the four trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (0, 3). Notethat the rightmost example is isomorphic as an abstract graph to the unique trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong>graph <strong>of</strong> type (1, 1). However, the two graphs possess different ribb<strong>on</strong> structures and representdifferent topological surfaces.1 232 313 12123The set <strong>of</strong> ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) is denoted by RG g,n . A particularly important subset <strong>of</strong>these is the set <strong>of</strong> trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n), which we denote by TRG g,n . We arenow in a positi<strong>on</strong> to state K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula.Theorem 3.4 (K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula). The psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,nsatisfy the following formula.∑|α|=3g−3+n〈τ α1 τ α2 · · · τ αn 〉n∏k=1(2α k − 1)!!s 2α k+1k2= ∑2g−2+n|AutΓ∈TRG g,nΓ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e)Here, E(Γ) denotes the set <strong>of</strong> edges <strong>of</strong> Γ and the expressi<strong>on</strong> (2α − 1)!! is a shorthand for (2α)!2 α α!. For anedge e, the terms l(e) and r(e) are the labels <strong>of</strong> the boundaries <strong>on</strong> its left and right. 11 Note that, although the left and right <strong>of</strong> an edge are not well-defined, the sum s l(e) + s r(e) certainly is.


68 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaK<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula is a rather amazing result. In fact, a priori, it appears asif it could not even be true, since the left hand side is explicitly a polynomial in 1 s 1, 1 s 2, . . . , 1s nwhile the right hand side <strong>on</strong>ly appears to be a rati<strong>on</strong>al functi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> s 1 , s 2 , . . . , s n . To see how theformula works in practice, c<strong>on</strong>sider the following examples.Example 3.5. In the case (g, n) = (1, 1), the <strong>on</strong>ly c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> to the left hand side is 〈τ 1 〉 1 ,s 3 1resulting from α 1 = 1. There is <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e term <strong>on</strong> the right hand side, corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to theunique trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (1, 1), discussed in Example 3.2. Its c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> is2 × 1 6 × 1(s 1 + s 1 )(s 1 + s 1 )(s 1 + s 1 ) = 124s 3 .1Hence, we c<strong>on</strong>clude that 〈τ 1 〉 =24 1 , which agrees with the calculati<strong>on</strong> from Example 1.16.Example 3.6. In the case (g, n) = (0, 3), the <strong>on</strong>ly c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> to the left hand side is 〈τ 3 0 〉 1s 1 s 2 s 3,resulting from α 1 = α 2 = α 3 = 0. There are four terms <strong>on</strong> the right hand side, <strong>on</strong>e for eachtrivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (0, 3), discussed in Example 3.3. N<strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> these ribb<strong>on</strong> graphspossess n<strong>on</strong>-trivial automorphisms, so their c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong>s are as follows.2 313 121 231232(s 1 +s 1 )(s 1 +s 2 )(s 1 +s 3 )2(s 2 +s 2 )(s 2 +s 3 )(s 2 +s 1 )2(s 3 +s 3 )(s 3 +s 1 )(s 3 +s 2 )2(s 1 +s 2 )(s 2 +s 3 )(s 3 +s 1 )These four terms may be placed over a comm<strong>on</strong> denominator in order to simplify their sum.s 2 s 3 (s 2 + s 3 ) + s 3 s 1 (s 3 + s 1 ) + s 1 s 2 (s 1 + s 2 ) + 2s 1 s 2 s 3s 1 s 2 s 3 (s 1 + s 2 )(s 2 + s 3 )(s 3 + s 1 )(s= 1 + s 2 )(s 2 + s 3 )(s 3 + s 1 )s 1 s 2 s 3 (s 1 + s 2 )(s 2 + s 3 )(s 3 + s 1 )= 1s 1 s 2 s 3Hence, we c<strong>on</strong>clude that 〈τ0 3 〉 = 1, which agrees with the calculati<strong>on</strong> from Example 1.14.From Witten to K<strong>on</strong>tsevichIn Secti<strong>on</strong> 1.2, we discussed the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, noting that <strong>on</strong>e<strong>of</strong> the landmark results in the area is Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture. This can be used, with the help <strong>of</strong>the string equati<strong>on</strong> and the base case 〈τ0 3 〉 = 1, to effectively calculate any psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>number. Apart from its actual c<strong>on</strong>tent, there are two notable aspects <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture.


3.1. K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula 69First, it emerged from the analysis <strong>of</strong> a particular model <strong>of</strong> two-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al quantum gravity.This is <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the more striking instances <strong>of</strong> the symbiosis between pure mathematics andtheoretical physics. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, the statement <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture involves the KdV hierarchy<strong>of</strong> partial differential equati<strong>on</strong>s, whose origin lies in the analysis <strong>of</strong> shallow water waves fromclassical physics. The KdV hierarchy is now known as the prototypical example <strong>of</strong> an exactlysolvable model, thereby providing a c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> and the <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g><strong>of</strong> integrable systems.The first pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture is due to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich [26] and relies <strong>on</strong> a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> the decorated <strong>moduli</strong> space M g,n × R n + previously noted by Harer, Mumford, Pennerand Thurst<strong>on</strong>. K<strong>on</strong>tsevich used the complex analytic formulati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> this theorem, which relies<strong>on</strong> results c<strong>on</strong>cerning quadratic differentials <strong>on</strong> Riemann surfaces with punctures. These areholomorphic secti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the complex line bundle T ∗ ⊗ T ∗ , where T denotes the tangent bundle<strong>of</strong> the Riemann surface. In a local coordinate z, a quadratic differential can be expressed in theform φ(z) dz 2 , where φ is a holomorphic functi<strong>on</strong>. The expressi<strong>on</strong> φ(z) dz 2 transforms underchange <strong>of</strong> coordinates to w as φ(z(w))( dzdw )2 dw 2 . A horiz<strong>on</strong>tal trajectory <strong>of</strong> a quadratic differentialis a curve al<strong>on</strong>g which φ(z) dz 2 is both real and positive. Am<strong>on</strong>g the quadratic differentials<strong>on</strong> a Riemann surface is the class <strong>of</strong> Jenkins–Strebel quadratic differentials, for which the uni<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>-closed horiz<strong>on</strong>tal trajectories has measure zero. This uni<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> n<strong>on</strong>-closed horiz<strong>on</strong>tal trajectoriesis then a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph embedded in the Riemann surface. Furthermore, if the Riemannsurface has genus g and n punctures, then the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph has type (g, n). One can naturallyassociate a positive real number to each edge <strong>of</strong> the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph by integrating the 1-form√|φ(z)| dz al<strong>on</strong>g the edge. This motivates the following definiti<strong>on</strong>.Definiti<strong>on</strong> 3.7. A metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph is a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph with a positive real number assignedto every edge. We refer to this number as the length <strong>of</strong> the edge and the sum <strong>of</strong> the numbersaround a boundary as the length <strong>of</strong> the boundary. 2Let MRG g,n denote the set <strong>of</strong> all metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) and observe that it has anatural topology. For every ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ <strong>of</strong> type (g, n), there is a subset MRG Γ ⊆ MRG g,nc<strong>on</strong>sisting <strong>of</strong> those metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs whose underlying ribb<strong>on</strong> graph is Γ. The set MRG Γcan be described as the quotient <strong>of</strong> an open cell can<strong>on</strong>ically homeomorphic to R |E(Γ)|+ by theacti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> Aut Γ. These orbifold cells glue together via edge degenerati<strong>on</strong>s — in other words,when an edge length goes to zero, the edge c<strong>on</strong>tracts to give a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph with fewer edges.In this way, we have endowed MRG g,n with not <strong>on</strong>ly a topology, but also an orbifold structure.Strebel [52] proved that, given a Riemann surface C with distinct points p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n and positivereal numbers x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n , there exists a unique Jenkins–Strebel quadratic differential <strong>on</strong>C \ {p 1 , p 2 , . . . , p n } whose associated ribb<strong>on</strong> graph has boundary lengths x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n . Onec<strong>on</strong>sequence <strong>of</strong> Strebel’s work is the following result.2 Note that if an edge is incident to a boundary <strong>on</strong> both sides, then its length must be included in the sum twice.


70 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaTheorem 3.8. The map J S : M g,n × R n +orbifolds.→ MRG g,n described above is a homeomorphism <strong>of</strong>Due to this theorem, the natural cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> MRG g,n gives rise to a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> M g,n × R n + . K<strong>on</strong>tsevich used this fact to to combinatorialise the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>and the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers. The end result was precisely K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorialformula. The right hand side <strong>of</strong> this formula can be interpreted as an enumerati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> trivalentribb<strong>on</strong> graphs which is, quite fortunately, amenable to Feynman diagram techniques. In particular,K<strong>on</strong>tsevich showed that this enumerati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs is governed by theasymptotic expansi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the following matrix model.F n (S) = log ⎣⎡ ∫ (exp− 1 2 tr SX2 + i 6 tr X3) dX∫ exp(− 1 2 tr SX2 )dX⎤⎦Here, the integrals are over the space <strong>of</strong> n × n Hermitian matrices, dX denotes the standardvolume form compatible with the metric d(X, Y) = √ tr (X − Y) 2 , and S = diag(s 1 , s 2 , . . . , s n ).Note that this idea <strong>of</strong> applying Feynman diagrams and matrix models to problems c<strong>on</strong>cerning<strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> was not without precedent. These techniques were previously utilisedin the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Euler characteristic <strong>of</strong> M g,n by Harer and Zagier [21] and also by Penner[49]. Furthermore, the link between Hermitian matrix models and integrable systems hadalready been established, so it was a relatively straightforward matter for K<strong>on</strong>tsevich to thendeduce Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture.It should be noted that K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s paper [26], c<strong>on</strong>taining his pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture, isvery c<strong>on</strong>cise in nature. This is partly due to the fact that various technical results are stated withoutpro<strong>of</strong>. These centre around the compactificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space, the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> the decorated <strong>moduli</strong> space and the combinatorialisati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the psi-classes. Subsequently,Looijenga [29] provided rigorous pro<strong>of</strong>s for K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s claims about the compactificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong>the <strong>moduli</strong> space. The remaining subtleties arising from K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s paper are discussed infull detail in a paper by Zv<strong>on</strong>kine [64].The remainder <strong>of</strong> this chapter is dedicated to providing a new pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorialformula, from the perspective <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic geometry. One strength <strong>of</strong> this pro<strong>of</strong> isthat it avoids the complicati<strong>on</strong>s inherent in K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s groundbreaking work. Furthermore,it draws together the distinct pro<strong>of</strong>s <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture by K<strong>on</strong>tsevich and Mirzakhani.The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 0Recall our philosophy that any meaningful statement about the volume V g,n (L) gives a meaningfulstatement about the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and vice versa. In more explicit terms,


3.1. K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula 71Mirzakhani’s theorem — see Theorem 1.35 — asserts that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume takes theformV g,n (L) =(2π 2 ) m ∫ M g,nψ α 11∑ψα 22 . . . ψα n|α|+m=3g−3+n2 |α| α!m!n κ m 1L 2α 11L 2α 22. . . L 2α nn .So the intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>of</strong> psi-classes are stored in the top degree part <strong>of</strong> the volume polynomial.Therefore, informati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>cerning psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers can be accessed viathe asymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L). A fact well-known am<strong>on</strong>gst combinatorialists is that asymptotics are<strong>of</strong>ten more tractable than exact enumerati<strong>on</strong>, and it will be advantageous to subscribe to thisschool <strong>of</strong> thought. Indeed, the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes were calculated by Mirzakhani usingan intricate integrati<strong>on</strong> scheme which <strong>on</strong>ly produces a recursive formula. In this chapter, wewill calculate the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) directly and, hence, obtain informati<strong>on</strong> about psi-classintersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . In fact, this informati<strong>on</strong> turns out to be precisely K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’scombinatorial formula.The previous discussi<strong>on</strong> motivates us to study the following expressi<strong>on</strong> for a fixed n-tuple <strong>of</strong>positive real numbers x = (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ).limN→∞V g,n (Nx)= limN6g−6+2n ∑N→∞|α|+m=3g−3+n(2π 2 ) m ∫ M g,nψ α 11 ψα 22 . . . ψα nn κ m 12 |α| α!m!1= ∑2|α|=3g−3+n3g−3+n α! 〈τ α 1τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 x 2α 11x 2α 22. . . x 2α nnx 2α 11x 2α 22. . . x 2α nnN 6g−6+2n−2|α|This is a homogeneous symmetric polynomial whose coefficients store all <strong>of</strong> the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers <strong>on</strong> M g,n . The left hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula is alsoa homogeneous symmetric polynomial whose coefficients store the same informati<strong>on</strong>. Despitethe fact that they are clearly distinct, they are related by a simple transformati<strong>on</strong> — namely, theLaplace transform — as dem<strong>on</strong>strated by the following calculati<strong>on</strong>.{}V g,n (Nx)L limN→∞ N 6g−6+2n⎧⎨= L⎩∑|α|=3g−3+n= ∑ 〈τ α1 τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉|α|=3g−3+n⎫1⎬2 3g−3+n α! 〈τ α 1τ α2 . . . τ αn 〉 x 2α 11x 2α 22. . . x 2α nn⎭n∏k=1(2α k − 1)!!s 2α k+1kIn short, we have shown that the Laplace transform <strong>of</strong> the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> V g,n (L) is preciselythe left hand side <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula. It practically goes without saying thatour goal now is to show that it is also equal to the right hand side.{}V g,n (Nx)2L limN→∞ N 6g−6+2n = ∑2g−2+n|AutΓ∈TRG g,nΓ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e)(3.0)


72 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaTo do this, we need to deal with V g,n (Nx) in the N → ∞ limit, which leads us to c<strong>on</strong>siderhyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries. The key geometric intuiti<strong>on</strong> involved is that, in thelimit, the hyperbolic surface resembles a ribb<strong>on</strong> graph after appropriate rescaling <strong>of</strong> the metric.In the next secti<strong>on</strong>, we make this heuristic argument precise, thereby providing the desiredrelati<strong>on</strong> between the asymptotics <strong>of</strong> Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes <strong>on</strong> the <strong>on</strong>e hand and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs<strong>on</strong> the other.3.2 Hyperbolic surfaces and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphsCombinatorial <strong>moduli</strong> spaceFor an n-tuple <strong>of</strong> positive real numbers x = (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ), define MRG g,n (x) to be the set<strong>of</strong> metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs <strong>of</strong> type (g, n), where the length <strong>of</strong> the boundary labelled k is x k . Asa subset <strong>of</strong> MRG g,n , it inherits not <strong>on</strong>ly a topology, but also an orbifold structure. The mainreas<strong>on</strong> for c<strong>on</strong>sidering this space is the following theorem, which justifies referring to it as thecombinatorial <strong>moduli</strong> space.Theorem 3.9. The <strong>spaces</strong> M g,n (x) and MRG g,n (x) are homeomorphic as orbifolds.Our pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> this theorem will essentially imitate the work <strong>of</strong> Bowditch and Epstein, who c<strong>on</strong>sideredthe case <strong>of</strong> cusped hyperbolic surfaces [5]. The main idea is to associate to a hyperbolicsurface S with geodesic boundary its spine Γ(S), otherwise referred to as its cut locus. For everypoint p ∈ S, let n(p) denote the number <strong>of</strong> shortest paths from p to the boundary. Generically,we have n(p) = 1 and we define the spine asΓ(S) = {p ∈ S | n(p) ≥ 2}.The locus <strong>of</strong> points with n(p) = 2 c<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> a disjoint uni<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> open geodesic segments. Thesecorresp<strong>on</strong>d precisely to the edges <strong>of</strong> a graph embedded in S. The locus <strong>of</strong> points with n(p) ≥ 3forms a finite set which corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to the set <strong>of</strong> vertices <strong>of</strong> the aforementi<strong>on</strong>ed graph. In fact,if n(p) ≥ 3, then the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding vertex will have degree n(p). So Γ(S) has the structure <strong>of</strong> aribb<strong>on</strong> graph since the cyclic ordering <strong>of</strong> the half-edges meeting at every vertex can be derivedfrom the orientati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the surface. Furthermore, it is a deformati<strong>on</strong> retract <strong>of</strong> the originalhyperbolic surface, so if S has genus g and n boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents, then Γ(S) will be a ribb<strong>on</strong>graph <strong>of</strong> type (g, n).Now for each vertex p <strong>of</strong> Γ(S), c<strong>on</strong>sider the n(p) shortest paths from p to the boundary. We referto these geodesic segments, which are perpendicular to the boundary <strong>of</strong> S, as ribs. The diagrambelow shows part <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surface S, al<strong>on</strong>g with its spine and ribs. Note that cutting Sal<strong>on</strong>g its ribs leaves a collecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> hexag<strong>on</strong>s, each with four right angles and a reflective axis


3.2. Hyperbolic surfaces and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs 73<strong>of</strong> symmetry al<strong>on</strong>g <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the diag<strong>on</strong>als. In fact, this diag<strong>on</strong>al is <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the edges <strong>of</strong> Γ(S) andwe assign to it the length <strong>of</strong> the side <strong>of</strong> the hexag<strong>on</strong> which lies al<strong>on</strong>g the boundary <strong>of</strong> S. Ofcourse, there are two such sides; however, the reflective symmetry <strong>of</strong> the hexag<strong>on</strong> guaranteesthat they have the same length. In this way, Γ(S) becomes a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (g, n).By c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, the sum <strong>of</strong> the edge lengths around each boundary <strong>of</strong> Γ(S) coincides preciselywith the length <strong>of</strong> the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding boundary in S. In other words, we have c<strong>on</strong>structed a mapΓ : M g,n (x) → MRG g,n (x). We now c<strong>on</strong>sider the n<strong>on</strong>-trivial task <strong>of</strong> showing that this map isbijective by c<strong>on</strong>structing the inverse map.Fix a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ ∈ MRG g,n (x) whose vertex and edge sets are V and E, respectively.We wish to c<strong>on</strong>struct a hyperbolic surface S(Γ) whose spine is precisely this metricribb<strong>on</strong> graph. Given r ∈ R V + which assigns a positive real number to each vertex, <strong>on</strong>e can determinewhether or not these c<strong>on</strong>stitute the set <strong>of</strong> rib lengths for such a hyperbolic surface S(Γ).The data <strong>of</strong> Γ and r together uniquely determine the symmetric hexag<strong>on</strong>s and the way that theyglue together. This produces a surface with spine Γ which has a hyperbolic structure away fromthe vertices <strong>of</strong> Γ. At the vertices, the surface obtained may have c<strong>on</strong>e points.This c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> yields a well-defined functi<strong>on</strong> F : R V → R V + which takes the set <strong>of</strong> rib lengthsto the set <strong>of</strong> c<strong>on</strong>e angles around the vertices. Note that we are now allowing the rib lengths tobe negative, a fact that will facilitate the pro<strong>of</strong> to follow. We will prove that there exists a uniquevalue <strong>of</strong> r ∈ R V such that F(r) = (2π, 2π, . . . , 2π). In order to do this, define the functi<strong>on</strong>θ : R 3 → R, where θ(l, r, s) denotes the measure <strong>of</strong> the labelled angle in the following diagram.DθrsCAlB


74 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaTo be more precise, c<strong>on</strong>struct the segment AB <strong>of</strong> length l in the hyperbolic plane, as shown. Thesegment AD is c<strong>on</strong>structed perpendicular to AB with length |r|, with D above or below the lineAB according to whether r is positive or negative, respectively. The segment BC is c<strong>on</strong>structedsimilarly, with length |s|. The angle θ(l, r, s) is the angle through which the line DA needs to berotated in an anticlockwise manner about D so that it coincides with the line DC.If F v (r) denotes the comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> F(r) corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to the vertex v, then we have the formulaF v (r) = 2 ∑ θ(l vw , r v , r w ).vwHere, the summati<strong>on</strong> is over the edges vw, l vw denotes the length <strong>of</strong> the edge and r v denotesthe comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> r corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to the vertex v. We make the following simple observati<strong>on</strong>sabout the behaviour <strong>of</strong> θ.Lemma 3.10. Define the functi<strong>on</strong> Θ : R 3 → R by Θ(l, r, s) = θ(l, r, s) + θ(l, s, r). Then θ and Θsatisfy the following c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s.(i) ∂θ∂r < 0(iv) ∂Θ∂s < 0 (v) r → ∞ ⇒ θ → 0(ii) ∂θ∂s > 0(vi) r → −∞ ⇒ θ → π(vii) r < 0 and r < s ⇒ θ > π 2(iii) ∂Θ∂r < 0For every W ⊆ V, let E W ⊆ E denote the set <strong>of</strong> edges in Γ which are incident to at least <strong>on</strong>evertex in W. Define the open polytope P ⊆ R V + by the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>: p ∈ P if and <strong>on</strong>ly if for everyn<strong>on</strong>-empty W ⊆ V,∑ p w < 2π|E W |.w∈WLemma 3.11. For a fixed metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ, the functi<strong>on</strong> F(a) is injective;(b) is an immersi<strong>on</strong>;(c) is proper; and(d) is a bijecti<strong>on</strong> from R V → P.Pro<strong>of</strong>. The pro<strong>of</strong> hinges <strong>on</strong> the facts stated in Lemma 3.10.(a) In order to obtain a c<strong>on</strong>tradicti<strong>on</strong>, suppose that F(r) = F(s) for r ̸= s. Without loss <strong>of</strong>generality, assume that r v < s v for some v ∈ V and let m = max(r, s). Then from (iii), it


3.2. Hyperbolic surfaces and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs 75follows that∑ F v (r) > ∑ F v (m).v∈Vv∈VSo there must exist w ∈ V such that F w (r) > F w (m). But by (i) and (ii), w must satisfyr w < m w and it follows that s w = m w . Again by (ii), this implies that F w (m) ≥ F w (s) andwe have the c<strong>on</strong>tradicti<strong>on</strong> F w (r) > F w (s).(b) In order to obtain a c<strong>on</strong>tradicti<strong>on</strong>, suppose that at some r ∈ R V we have DF(x) = 0 forx ̸= 0. Without loss <strong>of</strong> generality, assume that at least <strong>on</strong>e comp<strong>on</strong>ent <strong>of</strong> x is negative andlet y = max(x, 0). Then from (iii), it follows that∑ DF v (y) < ∑ DF v (x).v∈Vv∈VNow c<strong>on</strong>sider the n<strong>on</strong>-empty set W = {v ∈ V | x v < 0}. Then (ii) implies that DF v (y) ≥DF v (x) for all v /∈ W. So there must exist w ∈ W such that DF w (y) < DF w (x). However, by(i) and the fact that y w = 0, DF w (y) ≥ 0 and we have the c<strong>on</strong>tradicti<strong>on</strong> DF w (x) > 0.(c) Let r 0 , r 1 , r 2 , . . . be a sequence <strong>of</strong> points in R V which c<strong>on</strong>verges to infinity. We will showthat the sequence F(r 0 ), F(r 1 ), F(r 2 ), . . . c<strong>on</strong>verges to the boundary <strong>of</strong> P. First, write V asthe disjoint uni<strong>on</strong> V − ⊔ V + ⊔ V 0 , where r v → −∞ for v ∈ V − , r v → +∞ for v ∈ V + , and r vc<strong>on</strong>verges to a finite limit for v ∈ V 0 . Then (v) implies that F v (r) → 0 for v ∈ V + . Hence,if V + is n<strong>on</strong>-empty, then F(r) c<strong>on</strong>verges to the boundary <strong>of</strong> P. So let us assume that V + isempty while V − is n<strong>on</strong>-empty. In this case, we can use (v) and (vi) to deduce that∑v∈V −F v (r) → 2π|E V− |.So F(r) c<strong>on</strong>verges to the boundary <strong>of</strong> P, as desired.(d) The fact that F : R V→ P is a bijecti<strong>on</strong> follows from the earlier parts and Hadamard’sobservati<strong>on</strong> that a local homeomorphism R N → R N is bijective if and <strong>on</strong>ly if it is a propermap.We are now ready to prove Theorem 3.9.Pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem 3.9. All that remains is to make the following three observati<strong>on</strong>s.First, we need to show that (2π, 2π, . . . , 2π) ∈ P. To see this, take some n<strong>on</strong>-emptyW ⊆ V and observe that 3|W| ≤ 2|E W |, since every vertex in W has degree at least 3.Therefore, we have the inequality 2π|W| ≤ 4π 3 |E W| < 2π|E W |, as desired.Thus far, we have allowed the rib lengths to be negative. In order to guarantee a b<strong>on</strong>afide hyperbolic structure, it is necessary to show that F(r) = (2π, 2π, . . . , 2π) implies


76 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulathat r ∈ R V + . However, note that if r v is minimal and negative, then by (vii) we haveF v (r) > 3π, a c<strong>on</strong>tradicti<strong>on</strong>. Therefore, we are now able to associate to a metric ribb<strong>on</strong>graph Γ a hyperbolic surface S(Γ) whose spine is precisely Γ. In other words, the mapS : MRG g,n (x) → M g,n (x) which we have c<strong>on</strong>structed is the inverse <strong>of</strong> the map Γ :M g,n (x) → MRG g,n (x) defined earlier.Finally, we need to show that the orbifold structure is preserved by the maps Γ and S. Inother words, for every metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ, it should be true that Aut S(Γ) ∼ = Aut Γ.Certainly every automorphism <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surface gives rise to an automorphism <strong>of</strong>the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph, since it preserves the spine. Therefore, there is aninjective homomorphism Aut S(Γ) → Aut Γ. Now suppose that f is an automorphism <strong>of</strong>the metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ. The fact that the map F defined earlier is injective coupled withthe fact that Γ = f (Γ) implies that the rib lengths <strong>of</strong> S(Γ) satisfy r v = r f (v) . Therefore,f extends to an automorphism <strong>of</strong> the metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph as well as the associated riblengths. However, this means that f extends to an automorphism <strong>of</strong> S(Γ) itself. So theinjective homomorphism described earlier is, in fact, an isomorphism <strong>of</strong> groups.The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 1Theorem 3.9 asserts that <strong>on</strong>e may equivalently c<strong>on</strong>sider either M g,n (x) or MRG g,n (x). Thereare at least two distinct advantages in adopting the latter viewpoint. The <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> metricribb<strong>on</strong> graphs possesses a tractable system <strong>of</strong> local coordinates provided by the edge lengths aswell as a natural orbifold cell decompositi<strong>on</strong>, which we now describe.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.12. There is an orbifold cell decompositi<strong>on</strong>MRG g,n (x) =⋃MRG Γ (x).Γ∈RG g,nIf E is the number <strong>of</strong> edges in Γ, then⎧⎨E − ndim MRG Γ (x) =⎩E − n + 1if Γ has at least <strong>on</strong>e odd degree vertex,if Γ has no odd degree vertices.Pro<strong>of</strong>. Simply let a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph lie in the set MRG Γ (x) if its underlying ribb<strong>on</strong> graphcoincides with Γ. In order to determine dim MRG Γ (x), label the edges <strong>of</strong> Γ from 1 up to E anddenote the length <strong>of</strong> the edge labelled k by e k . Then it follows from the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem 3.9that we can writeMRG Γ (x) = {e ∈ R+ E | Ae = x}/Aut Γ,where A denotes the n × E adjacency matrix between the boundaries and edges <strong>of</strong> Γ. Thec<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> Ae = x simply captures the linear c<strong>on</strong>straints that the edge lengths must satisfy in


3.2. Hyperbolic surfaces and ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs 77order for the boundary lengths to be prescribed by x. Since Aut Γ is finite — each automorphismis a permutati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the half-edges <strong>of</strong> Γ — the dimensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> MRG Γ (x) is given bydim MRG Γ (x) = E − rank A = E − n + nullity A T .C<strong>on</strong>sider Γ to be the 1-skelet<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a genus g surface whose faces aredenoted by { f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n }. We think <strong>of</strong> A T as a linear map from the real vector space withbasis { f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n } to the real vector space with basis the set <strong>of</strong> edges <strong>of</strong> Γ. Now suppose thata 1 f 1 + a 2 f 2 + · · · + a n f n ∈ ker A T and note that if f i and f j are adjacent faces, then a i + a j = 0.Since our surface is c<strong>on</strong>nected, it must be the case that |a 1 | = |a 2 | = . . . = |a n |.If Γ has a vertex <strong>of</strong> degree 2m + 1, then without loss <strong>of</strong> generality, suppose that the adjacentfaces, in cyclic order, are f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f 2m+1 . It follows thata 1 = −a 2 = a 3 = . . . = −a 2m = a 2m+1 = −a 1from which we c<strong>on</strong>clude that a 1 = 0. Therefore, a 1 = a 2 = . . . = a n = 0 and nullity A T = 0.The c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> that Γ has no odd degree vertices is equivalent to the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> that the dualgraph to Γ is bipartite. In other words, the faces can be coloured black and white so that adjacentfaces are opposite in colour. If we denote the formal sum <strong>of</strong> the black faces by f B and the formalsum <strong>of</strong> the white faces by f W , then ker A T is generated by the element f B − f W and it followsthat nullity A T = 1.In particular, if Γ is trivalent, then the dimensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> MRG Γ (x) is equal to 6g − 6 + 2n. Furthermore,if Γ is not trivalent, then the dimensi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> MRG Γ (x) is strictly less than 6g − 6 + 2n. ByTheorem 3.9, we may c<strong>on</strong>sider the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume <strong>of</strong> MRG Γ (x), which we denote byV Γ (x). Then, by Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.12, the volume <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space can now be expressed as thefollowing sum.V g,n (L) =∑Γ∈RG g,nV Γ (L)However, since the volume <strong>on</strong>ly cares about cells <strong>of</strong> top dimensi<strong>on</strong>, the sum need <strong>on</strong>ly be overthe trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graphs. So equati<strong>on</strong> (3.0) — which we wish to prove — becomes⎧⎨L⎩ lim∑N→∞Γ∈TRG g,nV Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n ⎫⎬⎭ =2∑2g−2+n|AutΓ∈TRG g,nΓ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e).Therefore, K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula will follow immediately <strong>on</strong>ce we are able toshow that{L limN→∞}V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n = 22g−2+n|Aut Γ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e). (3.1)


78 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula3.3 Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundariesPreliminary geometric lemmasSince we are interested in V Γ (Nx) in the large N limit, it is natural to c<strong>on</strong>sider hyperbolicsurfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries. More precisely, we fix a trivalent metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ ∈MRG g,n (x) and let NΓ ∈ MRG g,n (Nx) denote the same underlying ribb<strong>on</strong> graph with themetric scaled by a factor <strong>of</strong> N. We will be interested in the geometry <strong>of</strong> the hyperbolic surfacesS(NΓ) as N approaches infinity. It will be helpful to keep in mind the intuitive picture that, inthe limit, the hyperbolic surface S(NΓ) resembles the metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ after appropriaterescaling <strong>of</strong> the metric. In the following, this intuiti<strong>on</strong> will be made precise.Recall that NΓ occurs as the spine <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surface S(NΓ). Every edge e <strong>of</strong> NΓ is both adiag<strong>on</strong>al and the axis <strong>of</strong> symmetry <strong>of</strong> a hexag<strong>on</strong> obtained from cutting S(NΓ) al<strong>on</strong>g its ribs. Lifta neighbourhood <strong>of</strong> the edge e which includes this hexag<strong>on</strong> to the hyperbolic plane. The twosides <strong>of</strong> the hexag<strong>on</strong> parallel to e lift to two geodesic segments, which lie <strong>on</strong> two lines. We referto the comm<strong>on</strong> perpendicular between these two lines as the intercostal and denote its lengthby 2δ(e).Lemma 3.13. For any edge e,lim δ(e) = 0.N→∞Pro<strong>of</strong>. The diagram below shows an edge e and its corresp<strong>on</strong>ding hexag<strong>on</strong>. The boundary <strong>of</strong>the hexag<strong>on</strong> comprises four ribs which have been drawn as dotted lines and two boundarysegments which have been drawn as solid lines. Note that the intercostal is perpendicular tothe two boundary segments and hence, by symmetry, is perpendicular to the edge e. So thereare four hyperbolic trirectangles which occur in the diagram.NlδθδabDenote the length <strong>of</strong> the edge e in the metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ by l. C<strong>on</strong>sider the lower lefttrirectangle in the diagram and, without loss <strong>of</strong> generality, assume that the length marked a satisfiesa ≥ Nl2. By a standard hyperbolic trig<strong>on</strong>ometric formula for trirectangles — for example,


3.3. Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries 79c<strong>on</strong>sider the reference [6] — we have the equati<strong>on</strong> cos θ = sinh δ sinh a. It follows thatsinh δ = cos θsinh a ≤ 1sinh NlSo we have lim N→∞ sinh δ = 0, and the desired result follows immediately.2.Although the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> the previous lemma remains valid, the diagram used is somewhat misleading,since the intercostal may not actually intersect the edge e. However, the next lemmaguarantees that this assumpti<strong>on</strong> is indeed correct, at least for N sufficiently large.Lemma 3.14. If N is sufficiently large, then the intercostal corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to an edge intersects that edge.Pro<strong>of</strong>. Suppose that the intercostal <strong>of</strong> the edge e does not intersect it. C<strong>on</strong>sider a lift <strong>of</strong> e tothe hyperbolic plane, al<strong>on</strong>g with the associated intercostal <strong>of</strong> length 2δ, the adjacent boundarycomp<strong>on</strong>ents and the two ribs from e which lie closer to the intercostal, as shown in the diagrambelow.XδδrreYSuppose that the vertex adjacent to e closer to the intercostal is at distance r from the two adjacentboundary comp<strong>on</strong>ents. Then there must exist a third lift <strong>of</strong> a boundary comp<strong>on</strong>ent whichis at distance r from this vertex. Furthermore, the endpoints <strong>of</strong> this lift must lie between thepoints X and Y in the diagram. By Lemma 3.13, as N approaches infinity, the length δ approacheszero. And as δ approaches zero, it is clear that e cannot remain equidistant from thethree aforementi<strong>on</strong>ed lifts <strong>of</strong> boundaries without intersecting the intercostal.Lemma 3.15. Let γ be a closed geodesic <strong>of</strong> length m(γ) in NΓ. Since NΓ is a deformati<strong>on</strong> retract <strong>of</strong>the surface S(NΓ), the curve γ defines a unique closed geodesic <strong>on</strong> the hyperbolic surface S(NΓ) whoselength we denote by l(γ). Thenlim [l(γ) − m(γ)] = 0.N→∞


80 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaPro<strong>of</strong>. The previous lemma allows us to c<strong>on</strong>sider N sufficiently large so that we may cut thesurface S(NΓ) al<strong>on</strong>g the intercostals to obtain a collecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> right-angled hexag<strong>on</strong>s. Note that ifa closed curve enters a hexag<strong>on</strong> by <strong>on</strong>e intercostal, it must leave by another. So we can c<strong>on</strong>siderthe curve γ as the uni<strong>on</strong>M⋃γ =k=1where γ k denotes the part <strong>of</strong> γ between entering and exiting <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> these hexag<strong>on</strong>s. Let l(γ k )denote the length <strong>of</strong> γ k and let m(γ k ) denote the length <strong>of</strong> its projecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>to the adjacent boundary.Then by the triangle inequality, we havem(γ k ) ≤ l(γ k ) ≤ m(γ k ) + 2δ(e k ) + 2δ(e k ) ⇒ 0 ≤ l(γ k ) − m(γ k ) ≤ 2δ(e k ) + 2δ(e k ),γ kwhere the edges e k and e k corresp<strong>on</strong>d to the intercostals where the geodesic enters and exits thehexag<strong>on</strong>, respectively. After summing over k = 1, 2, . . . , M, <strong>on</strong>e obtains0 ≤ l(γ) − m(γ) ≤ 4M max δ(e k ).Lemma 3.13 can now be used to deduce that lim N→∞ [l(γ) − m(γ)] = 0.Lemma 3.16. C<strong>on</strong>sider two distinct homotopy classes <strong>of</strong> closed <strong>curves</strong> in Γ. These define homotopyclasses <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> in S(NΓ) for all N. Let the geodesic representatives <strong>of</strong> these homotopy classes intersectin an angle θ ≤ π 2. Then as N → ∞, we have θ → 0.Pro<strong>of</strong>. Cutting the surface al<strong>on</strong>g the intercostals leaves a collecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> right-angled hexag<strong>on</strong>s.Each <strong>of</strong> these hexag<strong>on</strong>s has three alternating sides which are intercostals and three alternatingsides which are boundary segments. If a simple closed geodesic enters <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> these hexag<strong>on</strong>svia <strong>on</strong>e intercostal, it must leave via another. Therefore, the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> two simple closedgeodesics, restricted to <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> these hexag<strong>on</strong>s, must resemble <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the following two diagrams.δθcaθb


3.3. Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries 81In the diagram <strong>on</strong> the left, as N approaches infinity, we may assume without loss <strong>of</strong> generalitythat the lengths denoted a and b also approach infinity. Furthermore, by Lemma 3.13, the lengthdenoted c approaches zero. The hyperbolic cosine rule states that cosh c = cosh a cosh b −sinh a sinh b cos θ or equivalently,cos θ = coth a coth b −Therefore, as N → ∞, we have cos θ → 1 and θ → 0.cosh csinh a sinh b .In the diagram <strong>on</strong> the right, as N approaches infinity, δ approaches zero by Lemma 3.13. Sincethe hexag<strong>on</strong> is right-angled, the two boundary segments adjacent to this intercostal limit to anideal vertex. The two geodesic segments lie between them, so the acute angle they form —namely, θ — must approach zero.These results c<strong>on</strong>cerning hyperbolic surfaces c<strong>on</strong>firm the intuiti<strong>on</strong> that, in the N → ∞ limit, thehyperbolic surface S(NΓ) resembles a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph. A precise statement <strong>of</strong> this fact canbe made by rescaling the hyperbolic metric and making use <strong>of</strong> Gromov–Hausdorff c<strong>on</strong>vergence.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.17. Given a metric ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ and a positive real number N, let Ŝ N denote the surfaceS(NΓ), where the hyperbolic metric has been scaled by a factor <strong>of</strong>1N. Then, in the Gromov–Hausdorfftopology, we havelim Ŝ N = Γ.N→∞Asymptotic behaviour <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> formNow let Γ ∈ TRG g,n be a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph and fix an n-tuple <strong>of</strong> positive real numbersx = (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ). We c<strong>on</strong>sider Γ to be embedded as the 1-skelet<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> agenus g surface, so that the boundary labelled k corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to a face <strong>of</strong> the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong>,which we also label k. Then for every positive real number N, we have the mapf : MRG Γ (x) → MRG Γ (Nx) → M g,n (Nx),which is a homeomorphism <strong>on</strong>to its image. This is the compositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> two maps — the firstscales the ribb<strong>on</strong> graph metric by a factor <strong>of</strong> N while the sec<strong>on</strong>d uses the Bowditch–Epsteinc<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> discussed in the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem 3.9. C<strong>on</strong>sider the normalised Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>symplectic form ω <strong>on</strong> MN 2 g,n (Nx) and note that it pulls back via f to a symplectic form <strong>on</strong>MRG Γ (x). We will be interested in the behaviour <strong>of</strong> this 2-form as N approaches infinity.The Fenchel–Nielsen coordinates, which are can<strong>on</strong>ical for the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form,provide local coordinates <strong>on</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space. They c<strong>on</strong>sist <strong>of</strong> 3g − 3 + n length parameters,which are simple to understand, and 3g − 3 + n twist parameters, which are more complicated


82 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulain nature. It is certainly desirable to have local coordinates for the <strong>moduli</strong> space, each <strong>of</strong> whichis the length functi<strong>on</strong> associated to some simple closed curve. The following theorem due toWolpert [60] asserts that this is possible and, furthermore, that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplecticform has a reas<strong>on</strong>ably simple descripti<strong>on</strong> in these coordinates.Theorem 3.18. In a genus g hyperbolic surface with n cusps, c<strong>on</strong>sider distinct simple closed geodesicsC 1 , C 2 , . . . , C 6g−6+2n with lengths l 1 , l 2 , . . . , l 6g−6+2n . For a point p ∈ C i ∩ C j , let θ p denote the anglebetween the <strong>curves</strong> at p, measured anticlockwise from C i to C j . Define the (6g − 6 + 2n) × (6g − 6 + 2n)skew-symmetric matrix X byX ij =∑p∈C i ∩C jcos θ p , for i < j.If X is invertible, then l 1 , l 2 , . . . , l 6g−6+2n are local coordinates for the <strong>moduli</strong> space and the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> symplectic form is given byω = − ∑ [X −1 ] ij dl i ∧ dl j .i


3.3. Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries 83unique homotopy class <strong>of</strong> multi<strong>curves</strong> <strong>on</strong> S(˜Γ). Let the unique geodesic representative in thishomotopy class be C k and denote its length with respect to the hyperbolic metric by l k . In thisway, we have length functi<strong>on</strong>s l 1 , l 2 , . . . , l 6g−6+3n <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ (x) and, in fact, <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ (Nx) forevery positive real number N. However, we will be more interested in the normalised lengthfuncti<strong>on</strong>s ̂l k = l kN for k = 1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 3n. Note that <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ(x), we also have the edgelength functi<strong>on</strong>s e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e 6g−6+3n . For a particular value <strong>of</strong> N, it is difficult to precisely relatethese two coordinate systems. However, the picture is much simpler in the N → ∞ limit, wherewe can use Lemma 3.15 to deduce the following.Case 1: If the edge labelled k is adjacent to two distinct faces, labelled i and j, thenlim ̂l k = x i + x j − 2e k .N→∞Case 2: If the edge labelled k is adjacent to the face labelled i <strong>on</strong> both sides, thenlim ̂l k = x i − 2e k .N→∞Case 3: If the edge labelled k is a loop, then ̂l k = 0.Observe that the functi<strong>on</strong> ̂l k can be naturally extended to an open subset U which satisfiesMRG Γ (x) ⊆ U ⊆ MRG g,n (x). Therefore, both ̂l k and its derivative c<strong>on</strong>verge uniformly <strong>on</strong>MRG Γ (x). It follows that <strong>on</strong>e may interchange the operati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> limit and derivative. Thus, inthe N → ∞ limit, we obtaind̂l k = −2de k , for k = 1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 3n.Now we turn our attenti<strong>on</strong> to the asymptotic behaviour <strong>of</strong> the matrix ̂X, the (6g − 6 + 3n) ×(6g − 6 + 3n) skew-symmetric matrix defined bŷX ij =∑p∈C i ∩C jcos θ p , for i < j.First, we introduce the oriented adjacency ̂B ij <strong>of</strong> edge i and edge j to be 0 if they are not adjacentor equal, and according to the following c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong> otherwise.ijjiijjiijB ij = −1B ij = +1B ij = 0B ij = −2B ij = +2


84 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaThis also defines a (6g − 6 + 3n) × (6g − 6 + 3n) skew-symmetric matrix. Note that ̂B is aninteger matrix by definiti<strong>on</strong> while ̂X is an integer matrix as a result <strong>of</strong> Lemma 3.16. In fact, thesetwo matrices are related by the following lemma.Lemma 3.19. In the N → ∞ limit, the matrix ̂X c<strong>on</strong>verges to −2̂B.Pro<strong>of</strong>. Suppose that the two <strong>curves</strong> C i and C j traverse a maximal path <strong>of</strong> c<strong>on</strong>secutive edges.Then in the N → ∞ limit, they will c<strong>on</strong>tribute +1 to ̂X ij if the diagram is as follows, −1 if the<strong>curves</strong> are reversed, and 0 otherwise.It is clear that if C i and C j are not adjacent to a comm<strong>on</strong> face, then the two <strong>curves</strong> do not meet atall and ̂X ij = 0. Now suppose that edges i and j do share a comm<strong>on</strong> face, but are not adjacent.Then the schematic diagram below, combined with our previous observati<strong>on</strong>, shows that C i andC j meet precisely twice, but with differing signs, so in the N → ∞ limit we have ̂X ij = 0.C ii ji jC jNow suppose that the oriented adjacency between edge i and edge j is −1. Then the schematicdiagram below, combined with our previous observati<strong>on</strong>, shows that C i and C j meet preciselytwice with positive orientati<strong>on</strong> so in the N → ∞ limit, we have ̂X ij = 2. The same argumentcan be used to prove that if the oriented adjacency between edge i and edge j is +1, then in theN → ∞ limit, we have ̂X ij = −2.i ji jC iC j


3.3. Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries 85There are a few other cases which may arise, for example when the oriented adjacency betweenedge i and j is ±2 or when vertices, edges or faces in the diagrams above coincide. However,these may be handled in an entirely analogous manner which is not worthy <strong>of</strong> reproducti<strong>on</strong>here. In c<strong>on</strong>clusi<strong>on</strong>, we have ̂X ij = −2̂B ij for all i and j in the N → ∞ limit.We state here the fact that the matrix ̂B has rank 6g − 6 + 2n, although the pro<strong>of</strong> will be delayeduntil Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.25. Therefore, we may assume that there existsI = {i 1 , i 2 , . . . , i 6g−6+2n } ⊆ {1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 3n}such that the matrix B formed from taking the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding 6g − 6 + 2n rows and 6g − 6 + 2ncolumns <strong>of</strong> ̂B is invertible. The matrix X is defined analogously from the matrix ̂X. The previousresults lead to the following result.Theorem 3.20. In the N → ∞ limit, f ∗ ωN 2 c<strong>on</strong>verges pointwise <strong>on</strong> MRG Γ (x) to a 2-form Ω.Pro<strong>of</strong>. We will assume without loss <strong>of</strong> generality that I = {1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 2n}, for ease <strong>of</strong>notati<strong>on</strong>. By Theorem 3.18, Lemma 3.19 and the observati<strong>on</strong> that d̂l k = −2de k in the limit, wehavefΩ = ∗ ωlimN→∞ N 2 = − lim ∑ [X −1 ] ij d̂l i ∧ d̂l jN→∞i


86 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulawhere A is the adjacency matrix between faces and edges. In other words, A ij is the number <strong>of</strong>times that face i is adjacent to edge j in the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a genus g surface associated toΓ. Therefore, MRG Γ (x) can be interpreted as the quotient <strong>of</strong> a polytope by a finite group. Nowrecall that we are interested in the calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the following expressi<strong>on</strong>.limN→∞V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n = 1(3g − 3 + n)!∫ ( f ∗ )ω 3g−3+nlimN→∞ MRG Γ (x) N 2In Secti<strong>on</strong> 1.3, we stated that the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> form extends smoothly to a closed form <strong>on</strong>M g,n (L). Since M g,n (L) is compact, <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>sequence is the fact that V g,n (L) is finite. Therefore,we can invoke Lebesgue’s dominated c<strong>on</strong>vergence theorem to interchange the order <strong>of</strong> the limitand integrati<strong>on</strong> procedures.limN→∞V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n = 1(3g − 3 + n)!∫=MRG Γ (x)∫MRG Γ (x)Ω 3g−3+n(3g − 3 + n)!(limN→∞= 2 3g−3+n Pf B −1 ∫MRG Γ (x) de I=1 2 3g−3+n ∫√ de|Aut Γ| det BAe=x Ie>0f ∗ )ω 3g−3+nN 2Here, we have used the notati<strong>on</strong> de I = de i1 ∧ de i2 ∧ . . . ∧ de i6g−6+2n . The sec<strong>on</strong>d and third equalitiesfollow from Theorem 3.20, while the appearance <strong>of</strong> the factor in the final line is due1|Aut Γ|to the acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> Aut Γ <strong>on</strong> the polytope {e ∈ R 6g−6+3n+ | Ae = x}.We are now interested in performing the volume calculati<strong>on</strong>∫deAe=x I .e>0As a functi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> x, this volume is piecewise linear though not so easy to describe, due to thepositivity c<strong>on</strong>straints <strong>on</strong> e. However, its Laplace transform does have a simple descripti<strong>on</strong>, asdem<strong>on</strong>strated by the following result.Theorem 3.21. Suppose that A is an n × (m + n) matrix with rank n, n<strong>on</strong>-negative real entries, andpositive column sums. C<strong>on</strong>sider sets I ⊔ J = {1, 2, . . . , m + n}, where I = {i 1 , i 2 , . . . , i m } andJ = {j 1 , j 2 , . . . , j n }. Let V(x) denote the volume <strong>of</strong> the polytope P(x) = {e ∈ R m+n+ | Ae = x}with respect to the volume form de I = de i1 ∧ de i2 ∧ . . . ∧ de im . If A J is the n × n matrix formed by thecolumns <strong>of</strong> A indexed by elements <strong>of</strong> J and s t = (s 1 , s 2 , . . . , s n ), then the Laplace transform <strong>of</strong> V(x) isgiven bym+n1L{V(x)} = | det A J | ∏[Ak=1t .s] k


3.3. Hyperbolic surfaces with l<strong>on</strong>g boundaries 87Pro<strong>of</strong>. Let ̂P(x) denote the projecti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> P(x) <strong>on</strong>to the subspace defined by {e j = 0 | j ∈ J },and note that V(x) is the volume <strong>of</strong> ̂P(x) with respect to the volume form de I . If the matrix A Jis singular, then P(x) projects to a set <strong>of</strong> positive codimensi<strong>on</strong> in the subspace {e j = 0 | j ∈ J }.Therefore, both sides <strong>of</strong> the equati<strong>on</strong> are zero and the theorem is trivially true.So c<strong>on</strong>sider the case det A J ̸= 0. If we write e I = (e i1 , e i2 , . . . , e im ) and e J = (e j1 , e j2 , . . . , e jn ),then the following is true.e I ∈ ̂P(x) ⇔ e I > 0 and there exists e J > 0 such that A I e I + A J e J = x⇔ e I > 0 and A −1J A I e I < A −1J xIt is required to perform two integrati<strong>on</strong>s — <strong>on</strong>e for the volume calculati<strong>on</strong> and <strong>on</strong>e for theLaplace transform. Our first step will be to switch the order <strong>of</strong> integrati<strong>on</strong>.L{V(x)} = L∫={ ∫Ae=xe>0} (∫ ∫de I =x>0 Ae=xe>0e I >0( ∫A −1J A I e I 0 A −1J A I e I 0 A −1J A J s, y〉) dy de II e I 0∫ ∞0exp(−〈A t I s, e I〉) de Iexp(−[A t s] i e i ) de iNow recall that the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula will be complete <strong>on</strong>ce we proveequati<strong>on</strong> (3.1).{L limN→∞}V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n = 22g−2+n|Aut Γ|∏e∈E(Γ)1s l(e) + s r(e)


88 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaTheorem 3.21 can now be applied to our setting with m = 6g − 6 + 2n and A representing then × (6g − 6 + 3n) adjacency matrix between faces and edges <strong>of</strong> Γ.{L limN→∞}V Γ (Nx)N 6g−6+2n ={1 2 3g−3+n ∫}√ L de|Aut Γ| det BAe=x Ie>0= 23g−3+n | det A J ||Aut Γ|∏k=1√det B6g−6+3n= 23g−3+n | det A J |√|Aut Γ| det B∏e∈E(Γ)1[A t s] k1s l(e) + s r(e)The first equality we have already deduced from Theorem 3.20, the sec<strong>on</strong>d equality followsfrom Theorem 3.21, and the third equality uses the combinatorial structure <strong>of</strong> the matrix A. Soall that remains, in order to deduce K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula, is to prove that2 3g−3+n | det A J |√ = 22g−2+n|Aut Γ| det B |Aut Γ| ⇔ det B = 22g−2 (det A J ) 2 . (3.2)3.4 Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stantChain complexes associated to a ribb<strong>on</strong> graphThe final piece <strong>of</strong> the puzzle in our pro<strong>of</strong> is to deduce the correct combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant appearingin K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula. From the discussi<strong>on</strong> in the previous secti<strong>on</strong>,particularly equati<strong>on</strong> (3.2), this boils down to proving the following theorem c<strong>on</strong>cerning determinantsassociated to a coloured trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph.Theorem 3.22. Let Γ be a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) with n edges coloured white and theremaining 6g − 6 + 2n edges coloured black. Let A be the n × n adjacency matrix formed between thefaces and the white edges. Let B be the (6g − 6 + 2n) × (6g − 6 + 2n) oriented adjacency matrix formedbetween the black edges. Thendet B = 2 2g−2 (det A) 2 .Example 3.23. C<strong>on</strong>sider the following trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph <strong>of</strong> type (0, 4), with the two colouringsshown.1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4


3.4. Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant 89For the colouring <strong>on</strong> the left, we have the matrices⎡⎤1 1 0 0[A =0 1 1 1⎢⎣ 0 0 0 1⎥⎦ and B =1 0 1 00 1−1 0]which satisfy det A = −2 and det B = 1. For the colouring <strong>on</strong> the right, we have the matrices⎡⎤1 1 0 0[ ]A =0 1 1 0⎢⎣ 0 0 1 1⎥⎦ and B = 0 00 01 0 0 1which satisfy det A = 0 and det B = 0. Therefore, Theorem 3.22 is certainly satisfied for the twocolourings <strong>of</strong> this trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph.For the remainder <strong>of</strong> this secti<strong>on</strong>, fix a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) with n edgescoloured white and the remaining 6g − 6 + 2n edges coloured black. C<strong>on</strong>sider Γ to be the1-skelet<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> a closed genus g surface. This cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> necessarilyc<strong>on</strong>sists <strong>of</strong> 4g − 4 + 2n vertices, 6g − 6 + 3n edges and n faces. Denote the edges bye 1 , e 2 , . . . , e 6g−6+3n and the faces by f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n . C<strong>on</strong>sider the sequence C <strong>of</strong> free Z-modulesd0 −→ C1 d1 −→2 dC2 −→3C3 −→ C4 −→ 0,where C 1 = C 4 = 〈 f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n 〉 and C 2 = C 3 = 〈e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e 6g−6+3n 〉. We define the Z-modulehomomorphisms as follows.The map d 1 is the adjacency map from faces to edges <strong>of</strong> the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> associatedto Γ. In other words, for a face f adjacent to the m not necessarily distinct edgese 1 , e 2 , . . . , e m as shown in the diagram below, letd 1 ( f ) = e 1 + e 2 + · · · + e m ,and extend d 1 to a homomorphism <strong>of</strong> Z-modules.The map d 2 is the oriented adjacency map <strong>on</strong> the edges <strong>of</strong> the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> associatedto Γ. In other words, for an edge e adjacent to the four not necessarily distinct edgese 1 , e 2 , e 3 , e 4 as shown in the diagram below, letd 2 (e) = e 1 − e 2 + e 3 − e 4 ,


90 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaand extend d 2 to a homomorphism <strong>of</strong> Z-modules.The map d 3 is the adjacency map from edges to faces <strong>of</strong> the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> associatedto Γ. In other words, for an edge e adjacent to the two not necessarily distinct faces f 1 andf 2 as shown in the diagram below, letd 3 (e) = f 1 + f 2 ,and extend d 3 to a homomorphism <strong>of</strong> Z-modules.e 1e 2e 3e 4e 5e mfe 1ee 4f 1ee 2 e 3f 2Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.24. The sequence C is a chain complex <strong>of</strong> Z-modules.Pro<strong>of</strong>. There are two things to check — namely, that d 2 ◦ d 1 = 0 and d 3 ◦ d 2 = 0.Suppose that f is a face which is adjacent to the m not necessarily distinct edges e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e m , asshown in the diagram below. Furthermore, suppose that the edges e k and e k+1 are also adjacentto the edge e k , where the subscripts are taken modulo m.e 1e me 1e 2 e 2e me 3 fe 3e 4e 5e 4e 5d 2 ◦ d 1 ( f )= d 2 (e 1 + e 2 + · · · + e m )= ∑ d 2 (e k )= ∑(e k−1 − e k−1 + e k − e k+1 )= ∑ e k−1 − ∑ e k−1 + ∑ e k − ∑ e k+1= 0Since d 2 ◦ d 1 = 0 <strong>on</strong> the generators f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n , it holds for all elements <strong>of</strong> C 1 .Now suppose that e is an edge which is adjacent to the four not necessarily distinct edgese 1 , e 2 , e 3 , e 4 , as shown in the diagram below. Furthermore, suppose that the edges e k and e k+1


3.4. Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant 91are adjacent to the face f k , where the subscripts are taken modulo 4.f 4e 1e 4ef 1 f 3e 2 e 3f 2d 3 ◦ d 2 (e)= d 3 (e 1 − e 2 + e 3 − e 4 )= d 3 (e 1 ) − d 3 (e 2 ) + d 3 (e 3 ) − d 3 (e 4 )= ( f 4 + f 1 ) − ( f 1 + f 2 ) + ( f 2 + f 3 ) − ( f 3 + f 4 )= 0Since d 3 ◦ d 2 = 0 <strong>on</strong> the generators e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e 6g−6+3n , it holds for all elements <strong>of</strong> C 2 .Now let us c<strong>on</strong>sider C ⊗ R, the following sequence <strong>of</strong> vector <strong>spaces</strong> and linear maps.0 −→ C 1 ⊗ R d 1−→ C 2 ⊗ R d 2−→ C 3 ⊗ R d 3−→ C 4 ⊗ R −→ 0Of course, the linear maps are defined <strong>on</strong> the basis elements in precisely the same way as for thesequence C. In a hopefully excusable abuse <strong>of</strong> notati<strong>on</strong>, we will use d 1 , d 2 , d 3 to denote the Z-module homomorphisms <strong>of</strong> C as well as the linear maps <strong>of</strong> C ⊗ R. As a result <strong>of</strong> Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.24,the sequence C ⊗ R is a chain complex <strong>of</strong> real vector <strong>spaces</strong> although the following propositi<strong>on</strong>asserts even more.Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.25. The chain complex C ⊗ R is exact.Pro<strong>of</strong>. Since C ⊗ R is a chain complex, it suffices to prove thatdim(ker d 1 ) = 0, dim(im d 1 ) = dim(ker d 2 ), dim(im d 2 ) = dim(ker d 3 ), dim(im d 3 ) = n.The fact that dim(ker d 1 ) = 0 follows from the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Corollary 3.12. Now observe that d 1 andd 3 are transposes <strong>of</strong> each other, with respect to the can<strong>on</strong>ical bases. If we invoke the rank-nullitytheorem, then all that remains to be proved is that dim(ker d 2 ) = n.As in Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.24, suppose that f is a face which is adjacent to the m not necessarily distinctedges e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e m . Furthermore, suppose that the edges e k and e k+1 are also adjacent to theedge e k , where the subscripts are taken modulo m.If ∑ a k e k ∈ ker d 2 , thena i−1 + a i − a i−12= a i + a i+1 − a i2for all i, where the subscripts are taken modulo m. So to the face f , we can associate the welldefinedvalueb = a 1 + a 2 − a 12= a 2 + a 3 − a 22= · · · = a m + a 1 − a m.2


92 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaThen d 1 (∑ b k f k ) = ∑ a k e k , from which it follows that ker d 2 ⊆ im d 1 . Since we have alreadyestablished that im d 1 ⊆ ker d 2 , we can now deduce that ker d 2 = im d 1 and dim(ker d 2 ) =dim(im d 1 ) = n.There are various implicati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> the previous result, such as the fact that the matrix ̂B used inthe statement <strong>of</strong> Lemma 3.19 has rank 6g − 6 + 2n. We also have the following result.Corollary 3.26. C<strong>on</strong>sider a trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ <strong>of</strong> type (g, n) with n edges coloured white and theremaining 6g − 6 + 2n edges coloured black. If <strong>on</strong>e forms the matrices A and B as per the statement <strong>of</strong>Theorem 3.22, then det A = 0 if and <strong>on</strong>ly if det B = 0.Thus, for the remainder <strong>of</strong> the secti<strong>on</strong>, we may assume that the colouring <strong>of</strong> the edges <strong>of</strong> Γ issuch that both A and B are invertible.Torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> an acyclic complexInteresting informati<strong>on</strong> is captured by the homology <strong>of</strong> a chain complex. When the complex isacyclic — that is, has zero homology — then <strong>on</strong>e can extract further informati<strong>on</strong> by c<strong>on</strong>sideringits torsi<strong>on</strong>. A simple example arises in the case <strong>of</strong> a linear map between two real vector <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong>the same dimensi<strong>on</strong>. An invariant under change <strong>of</strong> basis is the rank <strong>of</strong> the linear map. However,when the rank is maximal and bases for the vector <strong>spaces</strong> are fixed, then <strong>on</strong>e can also c<strong>on</strong>siderthe determinant. The noti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> torsi<strong>on</strong> is the natural generalisati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> this c<strong>on</strong>cept to acyclicchain complexes. For more informati<strong>on</strong>, see the first chapter <strong>of</strong> [42].Recall our definiti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> C ⊗ R as a sequence <strong>of</strong> real vector <strong>spaces</strong>, each with a can<strong>on</strong>ical basisdescribed in terms <strong>of</strong> the edges and faces <strong>of</strong> the cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> associated to Γ. We willcalculate the torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the acyclic complex C ⊗ R with respect to these bases in two distinctways.Method 1: Black and white edgesThe following is an approach for calculating the torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> an acyclic complex C given byd0 −→ C1 d1 −→2 d n−2 d n−1C2 −→ · · · −→ C n−1 −→ C n −→ 0.For each k, choose finite ordered collecti<strong>on</strong>s B k ⊆ C k with B n = ∅ such that the restricti<strong>on</strong><strong>of</strong> d k to B k is <strong>on</strong>e-to-<strong>on</strong>e and d k B k ∪ B k+1 is a basis for C k+1 . The fact that this is possiblerelies <strong>on</strong> the acyclicity <strong>of</strong> the complex. For two bases U and V <strong>of</strong> a vector space, let V/Udenote the matrix describing the base change U ↦→ V. Also, let X k be a basis for C k for allk and note that X = ⊕ X k is a basis for C = ⊕ C k . Then the torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> C with respect to


3.4. Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant 93the basis X is given by the equati<strong>on</strong>T (C, X) =n−1∏ det[d k B k ∪ B k+1 /X k+1 ] (−1)n−k .k=0Let us apply this to the acyclic complex C ⊗ R associated to the trivalent ribb<strong>on</strong> graph Γ.Suppose that the white edges <strong>of</strong> Γ are e i1 , e i2 , . . . , e i6g−6+2n . Let X 1 = X 4 = { f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n }and X 2 = X 3 = {e 1 , e 2 , . . . , e 6g−6+3n } be the can<strong>on</strong>ical bases for C ⊗ R. Note that, byassumpti<strong>on</strong>, the setsB 0 = ∅ B 3 = {e i1 , e i2 , . . . , e i6g−6+2n }B 1 = { f 1 , f 2 , . . . , f n } B 4 = ∅B 2 = {e i1 , e i2 , . . . , e i6g−6+2n }satisfy the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s required, so we have the following equati<strong>on</strong> for the torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> C ⊗ R.1T (C, X) = det[B 1 /X 1 ] ×det[d 1 B 1 ∪ B 2 /X 2 ] × det[d 12B 2 ∪ B 3 /X 3 ] ×det[d 3 B 3 ∪ B 4 /X 4 ]= 1 × 1det A × det B × 1det A= det B(det A) 2Method 2: Smith normal formInterpret the chain complex <strong>of</strong> real vector <strong>spaces</strong> associated to Γ as a linear map d : C → Cwhere C = ⊕ C k . With respect to the can<strong>on</strong>ical basis X, the map d is defined over theintegers, so diag<strong>on</strong>al coordinates are provided by the Smith–Jordan normal form. In otherwords, we can writeC 1 = 〈A 1 , A 2 , . . . , A n 〉C 2 = 〈B 1 , B 2 , . . . , B n , P 1 , P 2 , . . . P 6g−6+2n 〉C 3 = 〈Q 1 , Q 2 , . . . , Q 6g−6+2n , Y 1 , Y 2 , . . . , Y n 〉C 4 = 〈Z 1 , Z 2 , . . . , Z n 〉where the boundary maps are all diag<strong>on</strong>al in the following sense.d 1 A k = a k B k for k = 1, 2, . . . , nd 2 P k = b k Q k for k = 1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 2n d 2 B k = 0 for k = 1, 2, . . . , nd 3 Y k = c k Z k for k = 1, 2, . . . , n d 3 Q k = 0 for k = 1, 2, . . . , 6g − 6 + 2nNote that a k , b k and c k are integers which, by a simple change <strong>of</strong> basis, we may assumeto be n<strong>on</strong>-negative. Furthermore, they must be n<strong>on</strong>-zero in order for C ⊗ R to be acyclic.


94 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulaOnce again, we can express the torsi<strong>on</strong> as an alternating product <strong>of</strong> determinants. However,the diag<strong>on</strong>al coordinates allow us to express these determinants as products <strong>of</strong> positiveintegers.T (C, X) =(∏ b k )(∏ a k ) (∏ c k )However, the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the diag<strong>on</strong>al coordinates and the numbers a k , b k , c k leadsdirectly to the following relati<strong>on</strong>s.n∏ a k = |H 2 (C)|k=16g−6+2n∏ b k = |H 3 (C)|k=1n∏k=1c k = |H 4 (C)|Equating these two torsi<strong>on</strong> calculati<strong>on</strong>s yields the equati<strong>on</strong>det B(det A) 2 =|H 3 (C)||H 2 (C)| × |H 4 (C)| . (3.3)Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.27. The Z-modules H 2 (C), H 3 (C) and H 4 (C) are vector <strong>spaces</strong> over F 2 .Pro<strong>of</strong>. The propositi<strong>on</strong> follows from the following three facts.If d 2 y = 0 for y ∈ C 2 , then there exists x ∈ C 1 such that d 1 x = 2y.Suppose that y = ∑ a k e k , where a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a 6g−6+3n are integers. Then by Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.25,there exist real numbers b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b n such that d 1 (∑ b k f k ) = ∑ a k e k . C<strong>on</strong>sider an edgee 1 and a vertex v adjacent to e 1 . Assume without loss <strong>of</strong> generality that the three notnecessarily distinct edges e 1 , e 2 , e 3 and the three not necessarily distinct faces f 1 , f 2 , f 3 areadjacent to v. Then <strong>on</strong>e can deduce the following.a 1 = b 2 + b 3 2b 1 = a 2 + a 3 − a 1a 2 = b 3 + b 1 ⇒ 2b 2 = a 3 + a 1 − a 2a 3 = b 1 + b 2 2b 3 = a 1 + a 2 − a 3Therefore, b 1 , b 2 , b 3 are half-integers and the integral linear combinati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> faces definedby x = ∑ 2b k f k ∈ C 1 satisfies d 1 x = 2y, as required.If d 3 y = 0 for y ∈ C 3 , then there exists x ∈ C 2 such that d 2 x = 2y.Fix vertices v 1 , v 2 , . . . , v n , not necessarily distinct, with the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> that the vertex v k lies<strong>on</strong> the face f k . For an edge e adjacent to the faces f i and f j , c<strong>on</strong>sider the path from v i to v jwhich travels anticlockwise around f i , clockwise around f j and passes through the edge eprecisely <strong>on</strong>ce.


3.4. Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant 95v iv jf ief jFor example, the schematic diagram above indicates the path for a particular edge e. LetF(e) denote the formal sum <strong>of</strong> the edges traversed by this path and extend the mapF : C 3 → C 2 to a homomorphism <strong>of</strong> Z-modules. Now c<strong>on</strong>sider an edge e whose endvertices lie <strong>on</strong> the faces f i , f j , f k , f l , as shown in the diagram below. If e is not adjacent toany <strong>of</strong> v i , v j , v k , v l , then F ◦ d 2 (e) = F(e 1 ) − F(e 2 ) + F(e 3 ) − F(e 4 ) = −2e. The paths corresp<strong>on</strong>dingto F(e 1 ) and F(e 3 ) are shown in grey, while the paths corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to F(e 2 )and F(e 4 ) are shown in black. Note the cancellati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> black and grey edges everywhereapart from al<strong>on</strong>g the edge e itself.v llv i eikv kv jjIf e is adjacent to any <strong>of</strong> v i , v j , v k , v l , then the picture is slightly different, and we have theequati<strong>on</strong>F ◦ d 2 (e) = F(e 1 ) − F(e 2 ) + F(e 3 ) − F(e 4 ) = −2e − m i d 1 f i + m j d 1 f j − m k d 1 f k + m l d 1 f l .Here, m i = 1 or 0 depending <strong>on</strong> whether v i is adjacent to e or not, respectively, andm j , m k , m l are similarly defined. The following diagram shows an example where e isadjacent to v i , where the paths corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to F(e 1 ) and F(e 3 ) are shown in grey, whilethe paths corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to F(e 2 ) and F(e 4 ) are shown in black.


96 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formulav lliev i kv kv jjNow suppose that y = ∑ a k e k , where a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a 6g−6+3n are integers. In the particularcase when d 3 y = 0, we have the particularly nice result that F ◦ d 2 (y) = −2y. It followsthat d 2 ◦ F t (y) = 2y, where we have used the fact that the matrix representing the map d 2is skew-symmetric. Since F t is defined over the integers, it now suffices to take x = F t (y).For all y ∈ C 4 , there exists x ∈ C 3 such that d 3 x = 2y.C<strong>on</strong>sider a face f 1 and a vertex v <strong>on</strong> that face. Assume without loss <strong>of</strong> generality thatthe three not necessarily distinct faces f 1 , f 2 , f 3 and the three not necessarily distinct edgese 1 , e 2 , e 3 are adjacent to v. Then we can deduce the following.d 3 (e 2 + e 3 − e 1 ) = d 3 e 2 + d 3 e 3 − d 3 e 1= ( f 3 + f 1 ) + ( f 1 + f 2 ) − ( f 2 + f 3 )= 2 f 1Since the statement is true for the generators <strong>of</strong> C 4 , it holds for all y ∈ C 4 .The pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula: Part 3Recall that K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula follows immediately <strong>on</strong>ce we have proven Theorem3.22. To do so, we invoke the universal coefficient formula.H k (C; F 2 ) =))(H k (C) ⊗ F 2 ⊕ Tor(H k+1 (C); F 2)Propositi<strong>on</strong> 3.27 implies that H k (C) ⊗ F 2 = H k (C) and Tor(H k+1 (C); F 2 = H k+1 (C), so wehave the relati<strong>on</strong>H k (C; F 2 ) = H k (C) ⊕ H k+1 (C).


3.4. Calculating the combinatorial c<strong>on</strong>stant 97The cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> associated to Γ gives rise to a chain complex <strong>of</strong> free Z-modules X .∂0 −→ X2 ∂2 −→1X1 −→ X0 −→ 0Here, X 2 is generated by the faces <strong>of</strong> Γ, X 1 is generated by the edges <strong>of</strong> Γ, and X 0 is generated bythe vertices <strong>of</strong> Γ. There is also the dual cell decompositi<strong>on</strong> Γ ∗ which gives rise to the associatedchain complex <strong>of</strong> free Z-modules X ∗ .0 −→ X ∗ 2∂ ∗ 2−→ X ∗ 1∂ ∗ 1−→ X ∗ 0 −→ 0Here, X2 ∗ is generated by the faces <strong>of</strong> Γ∗ , X1 ∗ is generated by the edges <strong>of</strong> Γ∗ , and X0 ∗ is generatedby the vertices <strong>of</strong> Γ ∗ . Since X 0 is can<strong>on</strong>ically isomorphic to X2 ∗ , these two chain complexes canbe glued together to obtain the following sequence <strong>of</strong> homomorphisms X .∂0 −→ X2 ∂2 −→1X1 −→ X0 ∼ = X∗∂2∗2 −→ X1∗∂ ∗ 1−→ X ∗ 0 −→ 0Tensoring with F 2 , we obtain a chain complex X ⊗ F 2 which coincides precisely with C ⊗ F 2 .∂0 −→ X 2 ⊗ F2∂2 −→2 X1 ⊗ ∗ F ◦∂ 12 −→ X1 ∗ ⊗ F ∂1∗2 −→ X0 ∗ ⊗ F 2 −→ 0Note that H 1 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = H 4 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = F 2 , since they are both equal to the corresp<strong>on</strong>dinghomology groups <strong>of</strong> the underlying genus g surface. Now c<strong>on</strong>sider the equati<strong>on</strong>dim(ker ∂ ∗ 2 ◦ ∂ 1) = dim(ker ∂ 1 ) + dim(im ∂ 1 ∩ ker ∂ ∗ 2 ).In order to put this to use, we note that ker ∂2 ∗ is generated by the fundamental class, whichis represented by the sum <strong>of</strong> the dual faces. Since this generator lies in im ∂ 1 — it is equal to∂ 1 applied to the sum <strong>of</strong> all edges — it follows that dim(ker ∂ ∗ 2 ◦ ∂ 1) = dim(ker ∂ 1 ) + 1. SoH 2 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = F 2g+12and, in summary, the following equati<strong>on</strong>s hold true.H 1 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = H 1 (C ⊗ F 2 ) = H 1 (C) ⊕ H 2 (C) = F 2H 2 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = H 2 (C ⊗ F 2 ) = H 2 (C) ⊕ H 3 (C) = F 2g+12H 3 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = H 3 (C ⊗ F 2 ) = H 3 (C) ⊕ H 4 (C)H 4 (X ⊗ F 2 ) = H 4 (C ⊗ F 2 ) = H 4 (C) = F 2The matrix representing d 1 has full rank — see Theorem 3.12 — so we have H 1 (C) = 0 and itfollows that H 2 (C) = F 2 , H 3 (C) = F 2g2 , and H4 (C) = F 2 . Finally, combining these homologycalculati<strong>on</strong>s with equati<strong>on</strong> (3.3) completes the pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Theorem 3.22.det B(det A) 2 =|H 3 (C)||H 2 (C)| × |H 4 (C)| = 22g−2


98 3. A new approach to K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula


Chapter 4C<strong>on</strong>cluding remarksIn this thesis, we have explored the fascinating world <strong>of</strong> intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong><strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. The recent work <strong>of</strong> Mirzakhani allows <strong>on</strong>e to adopt a hyperbolic geometric approachto obtain not <strong>on</strong>ly new results, but also new insights in this area.For example, we earlierintroduced the generalised string and dilat<strong>on</strong> equati<strong>on</strong>s, which relate Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes.These, in turn, can be interpreted as relati<strong>on</strong>s between intersecti<strong>on</strong> numbers <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong><strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. However, <strong>on</strong>e <strong>of</strong> the most interesting aspects <strong>of</strong> this work is the c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> revealedbetween the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n and the geometry <strong>of</strong> hyperbolic c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces.In another directi<strong>on</strong>, this thesis includes a pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula which,<strong>of</strong> course, is not in itself a new result. What is novel in this work is the crucial use <strong>of</strong> hyperbolicgeometry and the close relati<strong>on</strong>ship uncovered between the work <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich and Mirzakhani.One <strong>of</strong> the strengths <strong>of</strong> our pro<strong>of</strong> is the fact that it is both intuitive in nature and devoid<strong>of</strong> the technical difficulties inherent in the original. The unifying c<strong>on</strong>cept in this thesis is thephilosophy that any meaningful statement about the volume V g,n (L) gives a meaningful statementabout the intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> M g,n , and vice versa. It seems likely that <strong>on</strong>e can extendthis idea far bey<strong>on</strong>d the c<strong>on</strong>tent <strong>of</strong> this thesis.Our pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s combinatorial formula capitalised <strong>on</strong> the fact that the psi-class intersecti<strong>on</strong>numbers are stored in the top degree part — in other words, the asymptotics — <strong>of</strong> theWeil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes, which we now denote byṼ g,n (L) = limN→∞V g,n (NL)N 6g−6+2n .The crux <strong>of</strong> the pro<strong>of</strong> was the direct calculati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> Ṽ g,n (L) using results from hyperbolic geometryand some combinatorics. As part <strong>of</strong> joint work with Safnuk [10], we have recently extendedsome <strong>of</strong> the ideas in this thesis to prove the following recursive formula for these polynomials.99


100 4. C<strong>on</strong>cluding remarksTheorem 4.1. The asymptotics <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes satisfy the following formula.∫∫L 1 Ṽ g,n (L) =xy (L 1 − x − y) Ṽ g−1,n+1 (x, y, ̂L) dx dy0


Bibliography[1] ABIKOFF, W. The real analytic <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>of</strong> Teichmüller space, vol. 820 <strong>of</strong> Lecture Notes in Mathematics.Springer, Berlin, 1980.[2] ARBARELLO, E., AND CORNALBA, M. Calculating cohomology groups <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong><strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> via algebraic geometry. Inst. Hautes Études Sci. Publ. Math. 88 (1998), 97–127.[3] BERS, L. Spaces <strong>of</strong> degenerating Riemann surfaces. In Disc<strong>on</strong>tinuous groups and Riemannsurfaces. Princet<strong>on</strong> Univ. Press, Princet<strong>on</strong>, N.J., 1974, pp. 43–55.[4] BOGGI, M., AND PIKAART, M. Galois covers <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Compositio Math. 120, 2(2000), 171–191.[5] BOWDITCH, B. H., AND EPSTEIN, D. B. A. Natural triangulati<strong>on</strong>s associated to a surface.Topology 27, 1 (1988), 91–117.[6] BUSER, P. Geometry and spectra <strong>of</strong> compact Riemann surfaces, vol. 106 <strong>of</strong> Progress in Mathematics.Birkhäuser Bost<strong>on</strong> Inc., Bost<strong>on</strong>, MA, 1992.[7] CANNAS DA SILVA, A. Lectures <strong>on</strong> symplectic geometry, vol. 1764 <strong>of</strong> Lecture Notes in Mathematics.Springer–Verlag, Berlin, 2001.[8] DELIGNE, P., AND MUMFORD, D. The irreducibility <strong>of</strong> the space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> <strong>of</strong> given genus.Inst. Hautes Études Sci. Publ. Math., 36 (1969), 75–109.[9] DO, N., AND NORBURY, P. Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes and c<strong>on</strong>e surfaces. Available atarXiv:math/0603406v1 [math.AG].[10] DO, N., AND SAFNUK, B. Hyperbolic rescaling and symplectic structures <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong><strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Preprint.[11] EKEDAHL, T., LANDO, S., SHAPIRO, M., AND VAINSHTEIN, A. Hurwitz numbers andintersecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Invent. Math. 146, 2 (2001), 297–327.101


102 Bibliography[12] FABER, C. A c<strong>on</strong>jectural descripti<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the tautological ring <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>.In Moduli <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> and abelian varieties, Aspects <strong>of</strong> Math. E33. Vieweg, Braunschweig, 1999,pp. 109–129.[13] FABER, C., AND PANDHARIPANDE, R. Relative maps and tautological classes. J. Eur. Math.Soc. (JEMS) 7, 1 (2005), 13–49.[14] FANTECHI, B. Stacks for everybody. In European C<strong>on</strong>gress <strong>of</strong> Mathematics, Vol. I (Barcel<strong>on</strong>a,2000), vol. 201 <strong>of</strong> Progr. Math. Birkhäuser, Basel, 2001, pp. 349–359.[15] FULTON, W. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, Sec<strong>on</strong>d ed., vol. 2 <strong>of</strong> Ergebnisse der Mathematik und ihrerGrenzgebiete 3. Springer–Verlag, Berlin, 1998.[16] GOLDMAN, W. M. The symplectic nature <strong>of</strong> fundamental groups <strong>of</strong> surfaces. Adv. in Math.54, 2 (1984), 200–225.[17] GOLDMAN, W. M. Ergodic <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>. Ann. <strong>of</strong> Math. (2) 146, 3 (1997), 475–507.[18] GRABER, T., AND VAKIL, R. Relative virtual localizati<strong>on</strong> and vanishing <strong>of</strong> tautologicalclasses <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Duke Math. J. 130, 1 (2005), 1–37.[19] GUILLEMIN, V. Moment maps and combinatorial invariants <strong>of</strong> Hamilt<strong>on</strong>ian T n -<strong>spaces</strong>, vol. 122<strong>of</strong> Progress in Mathematics. Birkhäuser Bost<strong>on</strong> Inc., Bost<strong>on</strong>, MA, 1994.[20] HAIN, R., AND LOOIJENGA, E. Mapping class groups and <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. InAlgebraic geometry — Santa Cruz 1995, vol. 62 <strong>of</strong> Proc. Sympos. Pure Math. Amer. Math. Soc.,Providence, RI, 1997, pp. 97–142.[21] HARER, J., AND ZAGIER, D. The Euler characteristic <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Invent.Math. 85, 3 (1986), 457–485.[22] HARRIS, J., AND MORRISON, I. Moduli <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>, vol. 187 <strong>of</strong> Graduate Texts in Mathematics.Springer–Verlag, New York, 1998.[23] IGUSA, K. Combinatorial Miller-Morita-Mumford classes and Witten cycles. Algebr. Geom.Topol. 4 (2004), 473–520.[24] KAZARIAN, M. E., AND LANDO, S. K. An algebro-geometric pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’s c<strong>on</strong>jecture.J. Amer. Math. Soc. 20, 4 (2007), 1079–1089.[25] KIM, Y.-S., AND LIU, K. A simple pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten c<strong>on</strong>jecture through localizati<strong>on</strong>. Availableat arXiv:math/0508384v2 [math.AG].[26] KONTSEVICH, M. <str<strong>on</strong>g>Intersecti<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> and the matrix Airyfuncti<strong>on</strong>. Comm. Math. Phys. 147, 1 (1992), 1–23.


Bibliography 103[27] KRONHEIMER, P. B., AND MROWKA, T. S. Embedded surfaces and the structure <strong>of</strong> D<strong>on</strong>alds<strong>on</strong>’spolynomial invariants. J. Differential Geom. 41, 3 (1995), 573–734.[28] LOOIJENGA, E. Smooth Deligne-Mumford compactificati<strong>on</strong>s by means <strong>of</strong> Prym level structures.J. Algebraic Geom. 3, 2 (1994), 283–293.[29] LOOIJENGA, E. Cellular decompositi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> compactified <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> pointed <strong>curves</strong>.In The <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> (Texel Island, 1994), vol. 129 <strong>of</strong> Progr. Math. Birkhäuser Bost<strong>on</strong>,Bost<strong>on</strong>, MA, 1995, pp. 369–400.[30] MCSHANE, G. Simple geodesics and a series c<strong>on</strong>stant over Teichmuller space. Invent.Math. 132, 3 (1998), 607–632.[31] MCSHANE, G. Simple geodesics <strong>on</strong> surfaces <strong>of</strong> genus 2. Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn. Math. 31, 1(2006), 31–38.[32] MILLER, E. Y. The homology <strong>of</strong> the mapping class group. J. Differential Geom. 24, 1 (1986),1–14.[33] MIRZAKHANI, M. Simple geodesics and Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes <strong>of</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> borderedRiemann surfaces. Invent. Math. 167, 1 (2007), 179–222.[34] MIRZAKHANI, M. Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes and intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong><strong>curves</strong>. J. Amer. Math. Soc. 20, 1 (2007), 1–23.[35] MONDELLO, G. Combinatorial classes <strong>on</strong> M g,n are tautological. Int. Math. Res. Not., 44(2004), 2329–2390.[36] MONDELLO, G. Triangulated riemann surfaces with boundary and the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>Poiss<strong>on</strong> structure. Available at arXiv:math/0610698v3 [math.DG].[37] MORITA, S. Characteristic classes <strong>of</strong> surface bundles. Invent. Math. 90, 3 (1987), 551–577.[38] MULASE, M., AND SAFNUK, B. Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong> relati<strong>on</strong>s, Virasoro c<strong>on</strong>straints andthe KdV hierarchy. Indian J. Math. 50, 1 (2008), 189–218.[39] MUMFORD, D. Towards an enumerative geometry <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. In Arithmeticand geometry, Vol. II, vol. 36 <strong>of</strong> Progr. Math. Birkhäuser Bost<strong>on</strong>, Bost<strong>on</strong>, MA, 1983,pp. 271–328.[40] NÄÄTÄNEN, M., AND NAKANISHI, T. Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> areas <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> tori.Results Math. 33, 1-2 (1998), 120–133.[41] NAKANISHI, T., AND NÄÄTÄNEN, M. Areas <strong>of</strong> two-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong>. Proc.Amer. Math. Soc. 129, 11 (2001), 3241–3252.


104 Bibliography[42] NICOLAESCU, L. I. The Reidemeister torsi<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> 3-manifolds, vol. 30 <strong>of</strong> de Gruyter Studies inMathematics. Walter de Gruyter & Co., Berlin, 2003.[43] OKOUNKOV, A. Random trees and <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. In Asymptotic combinatorics withapplicati<strong>on</strong>s to mathematical physics (St. Petersburg, 2001), vol. 1815 <strong>of</strong> Lecture Notes in Math.Springer, Berlin, 2003, pp. 89–126.[44] OKOUNKOV, A., AND PANDHARIPANDE, R. Gromov-Witten <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, Hurwitz numbers,and matrix models, I. Available at arXiv:math/0101147v2 [math.AG].[45] OKOUNKOV, A., AND PANDHARIPANDE, R. The equivariant Gromov-Witten <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>of</strong> P 1 .Ann. <strong>of</strong> Math. (2) 163, 2 (2006), 561–605.[46] OKOUNKOV, A., AND PANDHARIPANDE, R. Gromov-Witten <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, Hurwitz <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>, andcompleted cycles. Ann. <strong>of</strong> Math. (2) 163, 2 (2006), 517–560.[47] OKOUNKOV, A., AND PANDHARIPANDE, R. Virasoro c<strong>on</strong>straints for target <strong>curves</strong>. Invent.Math. 163, 1 (2006), 47–108.[48] PENNER, R. C. The <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> a punctured surface and perturbative series. Bull.Amer. Math. Soc. (N.S.) 15, 1 (1986), 73–77.[49] PENNER, R. C. Perturbative series and the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> Riemann surfaces. J. DifferentialGeom. 27, 1 (1988), 35–53.[50] PENNER, R. C. Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes. J. Differential Geom. 35, 3 (1992), 559–608.[51] RAUSSEN, M., AND SKAU, C. Interview with Michael Atiyah and Isadore Singer. EuropeanMathematical Society Newsletter, 53 (September 2004).[52] STREBEL, K. Quadratic differentials, vol. 5 <strong>of</strong> Ergebnisse der Mathematik und ihrer Grenzgebiete3. Springer–Verlag, Berlin, 1984.[53] TAN, S. P., WONG, Y. L., AND ZHANG, Y. Generalizati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> McShane’s identity to hyperbolicc<strong>on</strong>e-surfaces. J. Differential Geom. 72, 1 (2006), 73–112.[54] THURSTON, W. P. Three-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al geometry and topology. Vol. 1, vol. 35 <strong>of</strong> Princet<strong>on</strong> MathematicalSeries. Princet<strong>on</strong> University Press, Princet<strong>on</strong>, NJ, 1997. Edited by Silvio Levy.[55] VAKIL, R. The <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> and its tautological ring. Notices Amer. Math. Soc.50, 6 (2003), 647–658.[56] VAKIL, R. The <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong> and Gromov–Witten <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g>. Available atarXiv:math/0602347v2 [math.AG].[57] WITTEN, E. Two-dimensi<strong>on</strong>al gravity and intersecti<strong>on</strong> <str<strong>on</strong>g>theory</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> space. In Surveysin differential geometry (Cambridge, MA, 1990). Lehigh Univ., Bethlehem, PA, 1991, pp. 243–310.


Bibliography 105[58] WOLPERT, S. On the homology <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> stable <strong>curves</strong>. Ann. <strong>of</strong> Math. (2) 118,3 (1983), 491–523.[59] WOLPERT, S. On the Kähler form <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>on</strong>ce punctured tori. Comment.Math. Helv. 58, 2 (1983), 246–256.[60] WOLPERT, S. On the symplectic geometry <strong>of</strong> deformati<strong>on</strong>s <strong>of</strong> a hyperbolic surface. Ann. <strong>of</strong>Math. (2) 117, 2 (1983), 207–234.[61] WOLPERT, S. On the Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> geometry <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> <strong>curves</strong>. Amer. J. Math.107, 4 (1985), 969–997.[62] ZOGRAF, P. The Weil-Peterss<strong>on</strong> volume <strong>of</strong> the <strong>moduli</strong> space <strong>of</strong> punctured spheres. In Mappingclass groups and <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> <strong>of</strong> Riemann surfaces (Göttingen/Seattle, WA, 1991), vol. 150<strong>of</strong> C<strong>on</strong>temp. Math. Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1993, pp. 367–372.[63] ZOGRAF, P. G. Liouville acti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> <strong>moduli</strong> <strong>spaces</strong> and uniformizati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> degenerate Riemannsurfaces. Algebra i Analiz 1, 4 (1989), 136–160.[64] ZVONKINE, D. Strebel differentials <strong>on</strong> stable <strong>curves</strong> and K<strong>on</strong>tsevich’s pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> Witten’sc<strong>on</strong>jecture. Available at arXiv:math/0209071v2 [math.AG].


106 Bibliography


Appendix AWeil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesA.1 Table <strong>of</strong> Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesThe following table shows various Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes V g,n (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n ). As previouslymenti<strong>on</strong>ed in Secti<strong>on</strong> 1.4, there may be a discrepancy <strong>of</strong> a power <strong>of</strong> two between these resultsand others in the literature. These are caused by a differing normalisati<strong>on</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong>volume form and by the particular orbifold nature <strong>of</strong> the <strong>spaces</strong> M 1,1 (L 1 ) and M 2,0 .g n V g,n (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n )0 3 1412 ∑ L 2 i + 2π2518 ∑ L 4 i + 1 2 ∑ L2 i L2 j + 3π2 ∑ L 2 i + 10π416 48 ∑ L 6 i + 16 3 ∑ L4 i L2 j + 3 4 ∑ L2 i L2 j L2 k + 3π22 ∑ L4 i + 6π2 ∑ L 2 i L2 j + 26π4 ∑ L 2 i + 244π6317384 ∑ L8 i + 24 1 ∑ L6 i L2 j + 32 3 ∑ L4 i L4 j + 8 3 ∑ L4 i L2 j L2 k + 3 2 ∑ L2 i L2 j L2 k L2 m + 5π212 ∑ L6 i+ 15π24 ∑ L 4 i L2 j + 15π2 ∑ L 2 i L2 j L2 k + 20π4 ∑ L 4 i + 80π4 ∑ L 2 i L2 j + 910π63 ∑ L 2 i + 2758π831 1148L 2 1 + π21221192 ∑ L4 i + 96 1 1 L2 2 + π212 ∑ L2 i + π44131152 ∑ L6 1 + 192 1 ∑ L4 i L2 j + 96 1 L2 1 L2 2 L2 3 + π224 ∑ L4 i + π28 ∑ L2 i L2 j + 13π424 ∑ L2 i + 14π69419216 ∑ L8 i + 1768 ∑ L6 i L2 j + 1384 ∑ L4 i L4 j + 1128 ∑ L4 i L2 j L2 k + 164 L2 1 L2 2 L2 3 L2 4 + 7π2576 ∑ L6 i+ π212 ∑ L4 i L2 j + π24 ∑ L2 i L2 j L2 k + 41π496 ∑ L4 i + 17π412 ∑ L2 i L2 j + 187π636 ∑ L 2 i + 529π8361592160 ∑ L10 i+4608 1 ∑ L8 i L2 j + 9216 7 ∑ L6 i L4 j + 384 1 ∑ L6 i L2 j L2 k + 192 1 ∑ L4 i L4 j L2 k+64 1 ∑ L4 i L2 j L2 k L2 m +32 1 L2 1 L2 2 L2 3 L2 4 L2 5 + 11π24608 ∑ L8 i + 35π21152 ∑ L6 i L2 j + pi216 ∑ L4 i L4 j+ 5π224 ∑ L4 i L2 j L2 k + 5π28 ∑ L2 i L2 j L2 k L2 m + 13π462 ∑ L6 i + 253π4192 ∑ L4 i L2 j + 35π48 ∑ L 2 i L2 j L2 k+ 809π6144 ∑ L4 i + 703π636 ∑ L 2 i L2 j + 4771π872 ∑ L 2 i + 16751π1090107


108 A. Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesg n V g,n (L 1 , L 2 , . . . , L n )2 043π 6216011442368 L8 1 + 138240 29π2 1 + 139π423040 L4 1 + 169π62880 L2 1 + 29π8192214423680 ∑ L10 i+294912 1 i L2 j + 2211840 29 i L4 j + 276480 11π2 i + 69120 29π2 i L2 j + 7680 7π2 1 L4 2+ 19π47680 ∑ L6 i + 181π411520 ∑ L4 i L2 j + 551π68640 ∑ L4 i + 7π636 L2 1 L2 2 + 1085π81728 ∑ L2 i + 787π104803153084160 ∑ L12 i+ 12211840 ∑ L10 iL 2 j + 114423680 ∑ L8 i L4 j + 1147456 ∑ L8 i L2 j L2 k + 296635520 ∑ L6 i L6 j+ 291105920 ∑ L6 i L4 j L2 k + 7122880 L4 1 L4 2 L4 3 + π2172800 ∑ L10 i+ 11π2110592 ∑ L8 i L2 j + 5π213824 ∑ L6 i L4 j+27648 29π2 ∑ L6 i L2 j L2 k + 3072 7π2 ∑ L4 i L4 j L2 k + 61440 41π4 ∑ L8 i + 211π427648 ∑ L6 i L2 j + 37π42304 ∑ L4 i L4 j+ 223π44608 ∑ L4 i L2 j L2 k + 77π62160 ∑ L6 i + 827π63456 ∑ L4 i L2 j + 419π6576 L2 1 L2 2 L2 3 + 30403π834560 ∑ L4 i+ 611π8216 ∑ L2 i L2 j + 75767π108640 ∑ L 2 i + 1498069π12648003 0176557π 1212096001 + 153508833280 L14 1 9555148800 77π2 1 2786918400 3781π4 1 + 418037760 47209π6 1 + 127189π826127360 L6 1 + 8983379π1087091200 L4 1+ 8497697π129331200L 2 1 + 9292841π14408240021856141332480 ∑ L16 i+121403533312 ∑ L14 iL 2 j + 77152882380800 ∑ L12 iL 4 j + 503+607214035333120 L8 1 L8 2 + 17π222295347200 ∑ L14 i+ 77π23185049600 ∑ L12 iL 2 j + 17π2+ 1121π22229534720 ∑ L8 i L6 j + 1499π47431782400 ∑ L12 i+ 899π4+ 191π44128768 L6 1 L6 2 + 3859π6139345920 ∑ L10 i185794560 ∑ L10 i267544166400 ∑ L10 iL 6 j88473600 ∑ L10 iL 4 jL 2 j + 10009π4371589120 ∑ L8 i L4 j+ 33053π669672960 ∑ L8 i L2 j + 120191π669672960 ∑ L6 i L4 j + 195697π892897280 ∑ L8 i+ 110903π84644864 ∑ L6 i L2 j 6977π8138240 L4 1 L4 2 + 37817π10430080 ∑ L6 i + 2428117π104147200 ∑ L 4 i L2 j + 5803333π123110400 ∑ L 4 i+ 18444319π123110400L 2 1 L2 2 + 20444023π141209600 ∑ L 2 i + 2800144027π16653184004 01959225867017π 184938071040001 + 116 +129588244450508800 L20 1149π 23698530556313600 L18 148689π 42397195730944000 8989483991040 50713π6 1+ 30279589π832105299968000 L12 1 + 43440449π10445906944000 L10 1 + 274101371π1244590694400 L8 1 + 66210015481π14292626432000 L6 1+ 221508280867π1650164531200L 4 1 + 74706907467169π181975228416000L 2 1 + 92480712720869π209876142080005 084374265930915479π 243555411148800001 + 148742490377990176768000 L26 17π 2133907940598874112000 L24 11823π 431067656673034240000 L22 1296531π+ 67766914168258560000 L20 1 + 68114707π 84271802792542208000 L18 1 + 474644754726912000 2123300941π10 L16 1+ 42408901133π1249442161950720000 L14 1 + 19817320001π14176579149824000 L12 1 + 11171220559409π161135151677440000 L10 1 + 62028372646367π18111244864389120 L8 1+ 202087901261599π2010534551552000L 6 1 + 626693680890100121π221738201006080000L 4 1 + 881728936440038779π24289700167680000L 2 1+ 21185241498983729441π262824576634880000A.2 Program for genus 0 Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumesThe following Maple routine, due to Norbury [9], uses the generalised string equati<strong>on</strong> in orderto calculate V 0,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) from V 0,n (L). A similar algorithm may be used to calculateV 1,n+1 (L, L n+1 ) from V 1,n (L). These programs have the advantage <strong>of</strong> being much faster thanimplementing Mirzakhani’s recursi<strong>on</strong>.


A.2. Program for genus 0 Weil–Peterss<strong>on</strong> volumes 109> # input: symmetric polynomial f in n variables L1,...,Ln# output: symmetric polynomial S in n+1 variables L1,...,L(n+1)# satisfying S(L(n+1)=0)=fsym:=proc(f) local i,j,k,m,S,T,T1,prod,sum,epsil<strong>on</strong>:S:=f:epsil<strong>on</strong>:=array[1..100]:for i from 1 to 100 do epsil<strong>on</strong>[i]:=0: od:while epsil<strong>on</strong>[n+1] # calculate the genus zero volumes recursively from evaluati<strong>on</strong># <strong>of</strong> V_(0,n+1) at L(n+1)=2*Pi*Ifor n from 3 to 12 doP:=0:for j from 1 to n doP:=P+int(L||j*V[n],L||j)od:Q0:=P:C0:=simplify(coeff(Q0,Pi,0)):sim:=sym(C0):V[n+1]:=sim:for k from 1 to n-2 doP||k:=sim-C||(k-1):Q||k:=subs(L||(n+1)=2*Pi*I,Q||(k-1)-P||k*Pi^(2*k-2)):C||k:=simplify(coeff(Q||k,Pi,2*k)):sim:=sym(C||k):V[n+1]:=V[n+1]+sim*Pi^(2*k):od:od:

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!